FCC ID: 2AHPN-BE2854 Automotive Infotainment Unit with Bluetooth/WLAN

 

Introduction IIntroduction

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5719765 Introduction CELL ID: 182557 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5710525 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jan-2021 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Truck Emblem, TAHOE, and Z71 are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle, model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to the printing of this owners manual. If the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine. Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features. Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2170298 CELL ID: 182559 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Browning, Reginald) Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2809732 CELL ID: 182561 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Danger, Warning, and Caution Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. Danger: Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. Warning: Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death. Caution: Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1954876 MODIFIED DATE: 14-May-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5637157 CELL ID: 182562 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator. M: Shown when the owners manual has additional instructions or information.

*: Shown when the service manual has additional instructions or information. 0: Shown when there is more information on another page see page. Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. See the features in this manual for information. uu: Air Conditioning System G: Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil 9: Airbag Readiness Light

!: Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$: Brake System Warning Light 9: Dispose of Used Components Properly P: Do Not Apply High Pressure Water B: Engine Coolant Temperature _: Flame/Fire Prohibited H: Flammable

[: Forward Collision Alert R: Fuse Block Cover Lock Location

+: Fuses j:

ISOFIX/LATCH System Child Restraints Q: Keep Fuse Block Covers Properly Installed

|: Lane Change Alert

@: Lane Departure Warning A: Lane Keep Assist

*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp

:: Oil Pressure X: Park Assist

~: Pedestrian Ahead Indicator O: Power 7: Rear Cross Traffic Alert I: Registered Technician

/: Remote Vehicle Start

>: Seat Belt Reminders I: Side Blind Zone Alert h: Stop/Start 7: Tire Pressure Monitor a: Under Pressure k: Vehicle Ahead Indicator

&elecfire : Risk of Electrical Fire Instrument Panel Overview d: Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5294826 CELL ID: 306966 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5294548 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) 1. Electric Parking Brake. 2. g Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. h Stop/Start Button (If Equipped). See Stop/Start System X Park Assist Button (If Equipped). See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing. ALane Keep Assist (LKA) (If Equipped). 5 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (If Equipped).

&v110enable 220/230 Volt Enable (If Equipped). See Power Outlets. 3. Air Vents. 4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals. Windshield Wiper/Washer. Rear Window Wiper/Washer. 5. Favorite Switches (Out of View). See Steering Wheel Controls. Volume Switches (Out of View). See Steering Wheel Controls. 6. Instrument Cluster. 7. Shift Buttons. See Automatic Transmission. Electronic Range Select (ERS). See Manual Mode. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System. 8. 9. Instrument Panel Storage. 10. Hazard Warning Flashers. 11. Infotainment. See Overview. 12. Dual Automatic Climate Control System. 13. Heated Front Seats (If Equipped). 14. Power Outlet (12V Direct Current) (If Equipped). See Power Outlets. 15. Rear Climate Control Buttons. See Rear Climate Control System. 16. USB Port. 17. Wireless Charging. 19. Steering Wheel Controls. 20. Horn. 18. ENGINE START/STOP. See Ignition Positions. 24. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light). 21. Hood Release. See Hood. 22. Steering Wheel Adjustment. 23. Cruise Control. Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System (If Equipped). Heated Steering Wheel (If Equipped). 25. Exterior Lamp Controls. Rear Fog Lamps (If Equipped). Instrument Panel Illumination Control. 26. Driver Mode Control Automatic Transfer Case Knob (If Equipped). See Four-Wheel Drive. Four Corner Air Suspension System (If Equipped). Keys, Doors, and Windows KKeys and Locks

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5376195 Keys CELL ID: 182576 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Warning: Leaving children in a vehicle with a remote key is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with theremote keyin the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with a remote key.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1968737 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Clark, Lorien)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437455 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The mechanical key inside the remote key is used for the driver door and glove box. To remove the mechanical key, press the button on the side of the remote key near the bottom, and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button. The mechanical key may have a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed. If it becomes difficult to turn a key, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick. If equipped with memory seats, remote keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5376212 CELL ID: 182675 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System If there is a decrease in the remote key operating range:

Do not make changes or modifications to the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). This could void authorization to use this equipment. Check the distance. The remote key may be too far from the vehicle. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Check the remote keys battery. See Battery Replacement later in this section. If the remote key is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395470 CELL ID: 182676 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation The Keyless Access system allows for vehicle entry when the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft). See Keyless Access Operation later in this section. The remote key functions may work up to 60m (197ft) away from the vehicle. Other conditions can affect the performance of the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437449 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Q: Press to lock all doors. If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash once on the second press to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled, the horn chirps when Q is pressed again within threeseconds. See Vehicle Personalization. Pressing Q arms the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System. If equipped with auto mirror folding, pressing and holding Q for one second will fold the mirrors, if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization. K: Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed again within threeseconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20seconds or until the ignition is turnedon. If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. If enabled, the exterior lamps may turn on. See Vehicle Personalization. Pressing K on the remote key disarms the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System. If equipped with auto mirror folding, pressing and holding K for one second will unfold the mirrors, if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization. Press and hold K until the windows fully open, if remote window operation is enabled. See Vehicle Personalization. b: Press twice to open or close the liftgate. Press once to stop the liftgate from moving. c: Press twice to open the liftglass. 7: Press and release to initiate vehicle locate. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds threetimes. Press and hold 7 for more than threeseconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is turned on or 7 is pressed again. The ignition must be off for the panic alarm to work.

/ : To remote start the vehicle, double press / from outside the vehicle using the remote key. The vehicle cannot be started if a remote key is left inside the vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start . Keyless Access Operation The Keyless Access system allows for doors and the liftgate to be accessed without removing the remote key from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The remote key must be within 1m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door being opened. If the vehicle has this feature, there will be a button on the outside door handles. Keyless Access can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. See Vehicle Personalization. If equipped with memory seats, remote keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats. Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door When the doors are locked and the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the lock/unlock button is pressed again within five seconds, all passenger doors and the liftgate will unlock. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437386 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:

It has been more than five seconds since the first lock/unlock button press. Two lock/unlock button presses were used to unlock all doors. Any vehicle door has been opened and all doors are now closed. Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Passenger Doors The lock/unlock button was used to unlock all doors. Any vehicle door has been opened and all doors are now closed. Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking of Exterior Door Handles and Liftgate If equipped, keyless unlocking of the exterior door handles and liftgate can be disabled and enabled. Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

When the doors are locked and the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger door handle will unlock all doors. Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash four times quickly to indicate access is disabled. Using any exterior handle to unlock the doors or open the liftgate will cause the turn signal lamps to flash four times quickly, indicating access is disabled. If disabled, disarm the alarm system before starting the vehicle. Disabling Keyless Unlocking may also be configured under Vehicle Personalization. Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash twice quickly to indicate access is enabled. Enabling Keyless Unlocking may also be configured under Vehicle Personalization. Passive Locking The Keyless Access system will lock the vehicle several seconds after all doors are closed, if the vehicle is off and at least one remote key has been removed from the interior, or none remain in the interior. If other electronic devices interfere with the remote key signal, the vehicle may not detect the remote key inside the vehicle. If passive locking is enabled, the doors may lock with the remote key inside the vehicle. Do not leave the remote key in an unattended vehicle. To customize the doors to automatically lock when exiting the vehicle, see Remote Lock, Unlock, Start under Vehicle Personalization. Temporary Disable of Passive Locking Temporarily disable passive locking by pressing and holding K on the interior door switch with a door open for at least four seconds, or until three chimes are heard. Passive locking will then remain disabled until Q on the interior door is pressed, or until the vehicle is turned on. When the vehicle is turned off and a remote key is left in the vehicle, the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed. To turn on or off see Vehicle Personalization. Remote Left In Vehicle Alert Remote Removed From Vehicle Alert If the vehicle is on with a door open, and then all doors are closed, the vehicle will check for remote keys inside. If a remote key is not detected, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display NO REMOTE DETECTED and the horn will chirp three times. This occurs only once each time the vehicle is driven. To turn on or off see Vehicle Personalization. Press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle to open the liftgate when all doors are unlocked, or when the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft). Press the exterior liftglass button to open the liftglass when all doors are unlocked, or when the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft). Keyless Liftgate Opening Keyless Liftglass Opening See Liftgate. Key Access To access a vehicle with a weak remote key battery, see Door Locks. Programming Remote Keys to the Vehicle Only remote keys programmed to the vehicle will work. If a remote key is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. When the replacement remote key is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining remote keys must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen remote keys will no longer work once the new remote key is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight remote keys programmed to it. See your dealer to program remote keys to the vehicle. Starting the Vehicle with a Low Remote Key Battery For improved vehicle security, the remote key is equipped with a motion sensor. When starting the vehicle, if the remote key has been idle for an extended period of time, the DIC may display KEY IN SLEEP MODE, MOVE KEY, THEN START. Move the remote key slightly and try starting the vehicle. If the remote key battery is weak or if there is interference with the signal, the DIC may display NO KEY FOUND, REPLACE BATTERY IN KEY or NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN KEY POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE when starting the vehicle. To start the vehicle:

With Bench Seat

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437450 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Without Bench Seat

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437452 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 1. Place the remote key in the remote key pocket. 2. With the vehicle in P(Park) or N(Neutral) press the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP. Replace the remote key battery as soon as possible. Battery Replacement Warning: Never allow children to play with the remote key. The remote key contains a small battery, which can be a choking hazard. If swallowed, internal burns can occur, resulting in severe injury or death. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed. Warning: To avoid personal injury, do not touch metal surfaces on theremote keywhen it has been exposed to extreme heat. These surfaces can be hot to the touch at temperatures above 59 C (138 F). Caution: When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the remote key. Static from your body could damage the remote key. Caution: Always replace the battery with the correct type. Replacing the battery with an incorrect type could potentially create a risk of battery explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to instructions and local laws. Do not attempt to burn, crush, or cut the used battery, and avoid exposing the battery to environments with extremely low air pressures or high temperatures. Replace the battery in the remote key soon if the DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY . To replace the battery:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437455 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 1. Press the button on the side of the remote key and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437456 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 2. With the mechanical key removed, insert a flat, thin object in the center of the remote key to separate and remove the back cover.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437459 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 3. Lift the battery with a flat object. 5. Insert the new battery, positive side toward the back cover. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5573686 CELL ID: 182677 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) If equipped with the remote start feature, the climate control system will come on when the vehicle is started remotely depending on the outside temperature. 4. Remove the battery. 6. Push together the remote key. 7. Reinsert the mechanical key. Remote Vehicle Start The rear defog and heated seats, if equipped, may also come on. See Heated Front Seats and Vehicle Personalization. Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles. Do not use remote start if the vehicle is low on fuel. The vehicle may run out of fuel. The vehicle cannot be remote started if:

The remote key is in the vehicle. The hood is not closed. The hazard flashers are on. The vehicle is not in P (Park). The vehicle is not off. There is an emission control system malfunction and the malfunction indicator lamp is on. Two remote vehicle starts or a start with an extension have already been used. The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if:

The coolant temperature gets too high. The oil pressure gets low. The remote key range may be reduced while the vehicle is running. Starting the Engine Using Remote Start Other conditions can affect the performance of the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System or Vehicle Personalization. 1. Press S twice on the remote key. The turn signal lamps will flash. The lamps flash to confirm the request to remote start the vehicle has been received. During the remote start, the doors will be locked and the parking lamps will remain on as long as the engine is running. 2. The engine will shut off after 15 minutes or after the remainder of the 30 minute total running time is used, unless you stop the remote start before engine running has completed or the vehicle is turned on. After two remote starts of 15 minutes, or multiple shorter time starts totaling 30 minutes have been used, the vehicle must be started and then turned off before the remote start can be used again. 3. Press the brake pedal and turn the ignition on to drive the vehicle. Extending Engine Run Time Remote start can be used for up to 30 minutes of total engine run time. Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start, do one of the following:

Press and hold S until the parking lamps turn off. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Turn the ignition on and then off. Door Locks Warning: Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5394427 CELL ID: 182683 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. The doors can be unlocked and opened while the vehicle is moving. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear seat belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this Press Q or K on the remote key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. from happening. To lock or unlock the doors from outside the vehicle:

Use the mechanical key in the driver door. To lock or unlock the doors from inside the vehicle:

Press Q or K on the power door lock switch. Pulling an interior door handle will unlock the door. Pulling the door handle again unlatches it. Keyless Access

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437386 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The remote key must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk or door being opened or locked. Press the button on the door handle to open. See Keyless Access Operation in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. Free-Turning Locks The door key lock cylinder turns freely when either the wrong key is used, or the correct key is not fully inserted. The free-turning door lock feature prevents the lock from being forced open. To reset the lock, turn it to the vertical position with the correct key fully inserted. Remove the key and insert it again. If this does not reset the lock, turn the key halfway around in the cylinder and repeat the reset procedure.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5504568 CELL ID: 182687 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Power Door Locks Press Q or K on the Remote Key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154223 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) Q: Press to lock the doors. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when locked. K: Press to unlock the doors. Security Status indicator

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437575 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) A light on the upper surface of the driver's door trim is used to indicate vehicle security status. This light will be OFF any time the ignition is ON, except momentarily when vehicle doors are locking. Solid:

Indicates securing with doors closed. Fast Flash:

Indicates securing with doors open. Slow Flash:

Indicates battery conserving secured state. No light:

Indicates unsecured state.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395259 CELL ID: 182689 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Delayed Locking This feature delays the locking of the doors until five seconds after all doors are closed. When Q is pressed on the power door lock switch while the door is open, a chime will sound three times indicating delayed locking is active. The doors will lock automatically five seconds after all doors are closed. If a door is reopened before that time, the five-second timer will reset when all doors are closed again. Press Q on the door lock switch again or press Q on the remote key to lock the doors immediately. This feature can be programmed. See Delayed Door Lock under Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395472 CELL ID: 182690 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the vehicle is shifted out of P(Park). If a vehicle door is unlocked and then opened and closed, the doors will lock either when your foot is removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph). To unlock the doors:

Press K on the power door lock switch. Shift the transmition into P(Park). Automatic door locking can be programmed. Lockout Protection

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395263 CELL ID: 182691 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) When locking is requested with the driver door open and the vehicle is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock. If the vehicle is off and locking is requested while a door is open, when all doors are closed the vehicle will check for remote keys inside. If a remote key is detected and the number of remote keys inside has not reduced, the driver door will unlock and the horn will sound three times. This can be manually overridden by pressing and holding Q on the power door lock switch.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395475 CELL ID: 182692 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Safety Locks The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4853075 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Aug-2017 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) The safety lock is on the inside edge of the rear doors. To use the safety lock:

1. Move the lever down to the lock position. 2. Close the door. 3. Do the same for the other rear door. To open a rear door when the safety lock is on:

2. Open the door from the outside. To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Move the lever up to unlock. Do the same for the other door. 1. Unlock the door by activating the inside handle, by pressing the power door unlock switch, or by using the remote key. When the safety lock is enabled, adults and older children will not be able to open the rear door from the inside. Cancel the safety locks to enable the doors to open from the inside. CELL ID: 182720 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Warning: Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

Close all of the windows. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems in the Index. If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. Caution: To avoid damage to the liftgate or liftgate glass, make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. DDoors

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5504509 Liftgate See Engine Exhaust. Manual Liftgate

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154233 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) To open the liftgate, press K on the power door lock switch or press K on the remote key twice to unlock all doors. Press the touch pad (1) on the underside of the liftgate handle and lift up. Press the button (2) above the license plate to open the liftglass, or press c twice quickly on the remote key. Do not leave the liftglass open when raising the liftgate. There will be a delay in the release of the liftglass if there is an attempt to open it while the rear wiper is in motion. Use the pull cup to lower and close the liftgate. Do not press the touch pad while closing the liftgate. This will cause the liftgate to be unlatched. The liftgate can be opened when locked if the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged. Power Liftgate Operation Warning: You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. Caution: Driving with an open and unsecured liftgate may result in damage to the power liftgate components.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5153923 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) If equipped, the power liftgate switch is on the overhead console. The vehicle must be in P (Park). The modes are:

MAX: Opens to maximum height. 3/4: Opens to a reduced height that can be set from 3/4 to fully open. Use to prevent the liftgate from opening into overhead obstructions such as a garage door or roof-mounted cargo. The liftgate can be opened manually all the way. OFF: Opens manually only. To power open or close the liftgate, select MAX or 3/4 mode and then:

Press b twice quickly on the remote key until the liftgate moves. Press 8 on the overhead console. The driver door must be unlocked or locked without the security armed. Press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle after unlocking all doors. A locked vehicle can be opened if the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154230 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) Press l on the bottom edge of the liftgate next to the latch to close. Press any liftgate button, the touch pad, or bon the remote key while the liftgate is moving to stop it. Pressing any liftgate button or pressing b twice quickly on the remote key restarts the operation in the reverse direction. Pressing the touch pad on the liftgate handle will restart the motion, but only in the opening direction. Caution: Manually forcing the liftgate to open or close during a power cycle can damage the vehicle. Allow the power cycle to complete. When stopping the gate at low heights it may partially reopen. The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled in extremely low temperatures, or after repeated power cycling over a short period of time. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. Select OFF on the liftgate switch. If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate will continue to completion. If the vehicle is accelerated before the liftgate has completed moving, the liftgate may stop or reverse direction. Check for Driver Information Center (DIC) messages and make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving. Falling Liftgate Detection If the power liftgate automatically closes after a power opening cycle, it indicates that the system is reacting to excess weight on the liftgate or a possible support strut failure. Remove any excess weight. A repetitive chime will sound while the falling liftgate detection feature is operating. If the liftgate continues to automatically close after opening, see your dealer for service before using the power liftgate. Interfering with the power liftgate motion or manually closing the liftgate too quickly after power opening may resemble a support strut failure. This could also activate the falling liftgate detection feature. Allow the liftgate to complete its operation and wait a few seconds before manually closing the liftgate. Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, the liftgate will automatically reverse direction and move a short distance away from the obstacle. After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate. After removing the obstructions, manually close the liftgate. This will allow normal power operation functions to resume. If the vehicle is locked while the liftgate is closing, and an obstacle is encountered that prevents the liftgate from completely closing, the horn will sound as an alert that the liftgate did not close. Setting the 3/4 Mode To change the position the liftgate stops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode and power open the liftgate. 2. Stop the liftgate movement at the desired height by pressing any liftgate button. Manually adjust the liftgate position if needed. 3. Press and hold l on the bottom edge of the liftgate next to the latch on the outside of the liftgate until the turn signals flash and a beep sounds. This indicates the setting has been recorded. The liftgate cannot be set below a minimum programmable height. If there is no light flash or sound, then the height adjustment may be too low. Manual Operation Select OFF to manually operate the liftgate. See Manual Liftgate at the beginning of this section. Caution: Attempting to move the liftgate too quickly and with excessive force may result in damage to the vehicle. Operate the liftgate manually with a smooth motion and moderate speed. The system includes a feature which limits the manual closing speed to protect the components. Hands-Free Operation If equipped with Hands-Free Vehicle Access, the liftgate may be operated with a kicking motion under the rear bumper at the location of the projected logo. The remote key must be within 1m (3ft) of the rear bumper to use hands-free feature. Splashing water may cause the liftgate to open. Keep the remote key away from the rear bumper detection area or turn the liftgate mode to OFF when cleaning or working near the rear bumper to avoid accidental opening. The hands-free feature will not work while the liftgate is moving.To stop the liftgate while in motion use one of the liftgate switches. The hands-free feature can be customized. See Vehicle Personalization. Choose from the following:

On-Open and Close: The kicking motion is activated to both open and close the liftgate. On-Open Only: The kicking motion is activated to only open the liftgate. Off: The feature is disabled.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5504496 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Feb-2021 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5504497 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Feb-2021 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) To operate, move your foot in a forward kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper, then pull it back. Do not sweep your foot side to side. Do not keep your foot under the bumper; the liftgate will not activate. Do not touch the liftgate until it has stopped moving. This feature may be temporarily disabled under some conditions. If the liftgate does not respond to the kick, open or close the liftgate by another method or start the vehicle. The feature will be re-enabled. When closing the liftgate using this feature, there will be a short delay. The rear lights will flash and a chime will sound. Step away from the liftgate before it starts moving. Projected Logo If equipped with this feature, a vehicle logo will be projected for one minute onto the ground near the rear bumper when a remote key is detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft) from the rear bumper. The projected logo may not be visible under brighter daytime conditions.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5095075 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Jun-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) The projected logo will not be restarted using the same remote key unless it has been out of range for longer than 20 seconds. If a remote key is again detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft) of the liftgate, or another kick has been detected, the one-minute timer will be reset. 1 m (3 ft) Hands-Free Operation Detection Zone 2 m (6 ft) Projected Logo Detection Zone The projected logo shows where to kick towards the rear bumper. The projected logo will not work under these conditions:

The vehicle battery is low. The transmission is not in P (Park). Hands Free Liftgate Control is set to off in vehicle personalization. See Vehicle Personalization. Power liftgate is turned off. The vehicle remains parked for 72 hours or more, with no remote key use or Keyless Access operation. To re-enable, press any button on the remote key or open and close a vehicle door. The projected logo will not work for a single remote key when a remote key:

Has been left within approximately 5 m (15 ft) of the liftgate for several minutes. Has been left inside the vehicle and all vehicle doors are closed. Has approached the area outside of the liftgate five times within 10 minutes. Lens Cleaning

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5420055 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) If equipped, use a cotton swab to clean the lens. Hands-Free Liftgate and Projected Logo Availability Remote key entering projected logo detection zone Remote key left inside projected logo detection zone for minimum of 10 minutes Off until remote key button press or a door is opened and closed Remote key brought in and out of projected logo detection zone five times or more within 10 minutes Off for one hour or until remote key button press or a door is opened and closed Vehicle remains parked for more than 72 hours Off until remote key button press or a door is opened and closed Action Hands-Free Liftgate Projected Logo Operative On for one minute Operative Operative Operative Vehicle battery is low Non-operative Off Off Off Transmission is not in P (Park) Non-operative Power liftgate is turned off Non-operative Hands-free liftgate is disabled in vehicle personalization Non-operative Off Power Assist Steps

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395723 CELL ID: 192449 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Hessler, Paul) Warning: To avoid personal injury or property damage, before entering or exiting the vehicle, be sure the power assist step is fully extended.Do not step on the power assist step while it is moving. Never place hands or other body parts between the extended power assist step and the vehicle. If equipped, the power assist steps will deploy when the door is opened and automatically retract three seconds after the door is closed. The power assist steps will retract immediately if the vehicle starts moving. Disable the power assist steps before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle. Too much ice buildup may prevent deployment of the power assist steps. Check the step position before exiting the vehicle. If this happens, disable the power assist steps, clear the ice, then enable the assist steps and confirm normal function prior to use. Keep hands, children, pets, objects, and clothing clear of the power assist steps when in motion. The steps will reverse direction if they encounter an obstruction when opening or closing. Remove the obstruction, then open and close the door on the same side to complete the motion ofthe assist steps.If the obstruction is not cleared, the assist steps remain extended while driving. To extend or retract both power assist steps for cleaning, see Vehicle Personalization. Enable/Disable To enable or disable the power assist steps, see Vehicle Personalization. CELL ID: 182724 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5396122 CELL ID: 182725 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) VVehicle Security

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2171094 Vehicle Security Vehicle Alarm System

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5437575 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The indicator light, on the driver door near the window, indicates the status of the system. See Power Door Locks Arming the Alarm System Turn off the vehicle. 1. 2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways:

Use the remote key. Use the Keyless Access system. With a door open, press Q on the interior of the door. 3. After 30 seconds the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to slowly flash. Pressing Q on the remote key a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system. The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the mechanical key. If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the remote key, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or the door is not unlocked by pressing K on the remote key during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated. The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the liftgate, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event. Disarming the Alarm System To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:

Press K on the remote key. Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system. Start the vehicle. To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

Lock the vehicle after all occupants have exited. Always unlock a door with the remote key, or use the Keyless Access system. Unlocking the driver door with the mechanical key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm. How to Detect a Tamper Condition If K is pressed on the remote key and the horn chirps three times, an alarm occurred previously while the alarm system was armed. If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5148328 CELL ID: 312928 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Hessler, Paul) Steering Column Lock If equipped, the steering column lock is a theft-deterrent device. This feature locks the steering column when the vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened, or when the driver door is opened and then the vehicle is turned off. The steering column unlocks when the vehicle is turned on. The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display one of these messages:

A message to service the steering column lock indicates that an issue has been detected with the column lock feature and the vehicle should be serviced. A message that the steering column is locked indicates that the engine is running, but the steering column is still locked. It is normal for the column to be locked during a remote start, but the column should unlock after the brake pedal is pressed and the vehicle is started. No message will display during a remote start. A message that the steering wheel must be turned and the vehicle must be started again indicates that the column lock mechanism is bound, the column locking device was unable to unlock the steering column, and the vehicle did not start. If this happens, immediately turn the steering wheel from side to side to unbind the column lock. If this does not unlock the steering column, turn the vehicle off and open the driver door to reset the system. Then turn the vehicle on and immediately turn the steering wheel side to side for about 15 seconds. In some cases, it may take significant force to unbind the column. To keep the steering column from binding, straighten the front wheels before turning off the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395813 CELL ID: 182730 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Immobilizer Operation This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system. The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off. The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition is turned on or to ACC/ACCESSORY and a valid remote key is present in the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2326622 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Mar-2012 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The security light, in the instrument cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. The system has one or more remote keys matched to an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched remote key will start the vehicle. If the remote key is ever damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle. When trying to start the vehicle, the security light may come on briefly. If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the vehicle will not change ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off), and the remote key appears to be undamaged, try another remote key. Or, you may try placing the remote key in the backup location. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. If the ignition modes will not change with the other remote key or in the backup location, the vehicle needs service. If the ignition does change modes, the first remote key may be faulty. See your dealer. It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement remote keys. Up to eight remote keys can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional remote keys, see your dealer. Do not leave the remote key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. CELL ID: 182742 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Nov-2016 MODIFIED BY: Perkins, Frank) Warning: A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5154623 CELL ID: 182746 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Trainor, William) EExterior Mirrors

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2346800 Convex Mirrors Power Mirrors

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154243 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press } or | to select the driver or passenger side mirror. The indicator light comes on. 2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up, down, right, or left. 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen. 4. Press either } or | again to deselect the mirror. The indicator light goes off. If equipped, the mirror has turn signal indicator lights, which flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Turn Signal Indicator Puddle Lamps Memory Mirrors Folding Mirrors Manual Folding Power Folding If equipped, puddle lamps project light from the bottom of the mirror to the area of ground below the driver and passenger doors. See Entry Lighting and Exit Lighting. The vehicle may have memory mirrors. See Memory Seats. Lane Change Alert (LCA) The vehicle may have LCA. See Lane Change Alert (LCA).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5154631 CELL ID: 182747 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Trainor, William) Fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154241 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2018 OWNER: Perkins, Frank) To adjust power folding mirrors, if equipped:

1. Press { to fold the mirrors inward. 2. Press { again to return the mirrors to the driving position. The outside mirrors may automatically unfold when the vehicle is driven above 20 km/h (12 mph), but may be folded with the power folding mirror switch. If the vehicle speed is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph), they may automatically unfold and may not be refolded with the power folding mirror switch. Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors Reset the power folding mirrors if:

The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position. The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. Remote Mirror Folding 1. 2. 3. Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A noise may be heard during the resetting of the power folding mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation. If equipped with power folding mirrors and the mirrors have been folded with the power folding mirror switch, they may not be unfolded by use of remote key. If equipped with power folding mirrors and the mirrors have not been folded with the power folding mirror switch and the vehicle is in P (Park), they may be automatically folded/unfolded as follows:

If doors are locked by pressing H on the remote key, the mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by pressing I on the remote key, the mirrors will unfold. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. If doors are locked by pressing the door handle button, the mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by pressing the door handle button, the mirrors will unfold. See Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. If passive locking is enabled and doors are locked by that feature, the mirrors will fold. See Passive Locking in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4823256 CELL ID: 182748 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Jun-2017 MODIFIED BY: Perkins, Frank) Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated mirrors:

K: Press to heat the mirrors. See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4925509 CELL ID: 182749 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Mar-2018 MODIFIED BY: Perkins, Frank) Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of the headlamps from behind. This feature comes on when the vehicle is started.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3560368 CELL ID: 206766 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Reverse Tilt Mirrors If equipped with reverse tilt mirrors and memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the curb to be seen when parallel parking. The vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or remains in R (Reverse) for about 30 seconds. The mirror(s) may move from their tilted position when:

The vehicle is turned off. The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse) above a set speed. To turn this feature on or off, see Vehicle Personalization. IInterior Mirrors

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2968584 Interior Rearview Mirrors CELL ID: 228477 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2913453 CELL ID: 182752 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Aug-2016 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) Manual Rearview Mirror Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it rearward for nighttime use to avoid glare of the headlamps from behind.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2909772 CELL ID: 182753 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror If equipped, automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started. WWindows

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2715175 Windows CELL ID: 182766 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning: Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1970744 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Jan-2015 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5633090 CELL ID: 182768 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jul-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Power Windows Warning: Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave theremote keyin a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat, use the window lockout switch to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5633063 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jul-2020 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) The power windows work when the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power

(RAP). Using the window switch, press to open or pull to close the window. The windows may be temporarily disabled if they are used repeatedly within a short time. Window Lockout With Folding Mirrors This feature stops the rear passenger window switches from working.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5633066 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jul-2020 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) Without Folding Mirrors

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5633067 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jul-2020 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) Press 2 to engage the rear window lockout feature. The indicator light is on when engaged. Press 2 again to disengage. Window Express Movement All windows can be opened without holding the window switch. Press the switch down fully and quickly release to express open the window. If equipped, pull the window switch up fully and quickly release to express close the window. Briefly press or pull the window switch in the same direction to stop that windows express movement. Window Automatic Reversal System The express-close feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will operate normally after the object or condition is removed. Automatic Reversal System Override Warning: If automatic reversal system override is active, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before using automatic reversal system override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path. When the engine is on, override the automatic reversal system by pulling and holding the window switch if conditions prevent it from closing. Programming may be necessary if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program each express-close window:

Programming the Power Windows 1. Close all doors. 2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY. 3. Partially open the window to be programmed. Then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed. 4. Open the window and continue to press the switch briefly after the window has fully opened. Remote Window Operation If equipped, this feature allows the windows to be opened remotely. If enabled in vehicle personalization, press and hold K on the remote key. See Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2387096 CELL ID: 182774 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Feb-2017 MODIFIED BY: Perkins, Frank) Sun Visors

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2326151 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Aug-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window and, if equipped, extend along the rod. RRoof

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5396298 Sunroof CELL ID: 182783 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Hessler, Paul) If equipped, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positions and Retained Accessory Power (RAP). While the sunroof always operates in express mode, movement can be stopped by pressing the switch again. The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5160706 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Oct-2018 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 1. SLIDE Switch 2. Power Sunshade Switch 3. TILT Switch Sunroof Operation:

Press and release D (1) to express-open to the fully open position. Pull and release D (1) to express-close. Press or pull D (1) again to stop at the desired location. Sunshade Operation:

Press and release C (2) to express-open. Pull and release C (2) to express-close. Press or pull C (2) again to stop at the desired location. Sunroof Vent Operation:

Press and release E (3) to vent the sunroof. Pull and release E (3) to close the sunroof vent. Automatic Reversal System The sunroof and power sunshade, if equipped, have an automatic reversal system that is only active when the sunroof and power sunshade are operated in express-close mode. If an object is in the path while express-closing, the reversal system will detect an object, stop, and open the sunroof or power sunshade slightly. If this condition occurs, attempt to remove the object, then pull and release the switch to express close. If the reversal occurs multiple times, the DIC message OPEN THEN CLOSE SUNROOF will display, and express is disabled. To operate sunroof while express is disabled, the switch must be either pressed or pulled and held.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3285327 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Feb-2013 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof. Seats and Restraints HHead Restraints

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152584 Head Restraints CELL ID: 182679 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) The vehicles front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. Warning: With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. If your vehicle has rear head restraints that fold down, always return them to the full upright position whenever an occupant is seated in the seat.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1968498 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Dec-2009 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Front Seats The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1881871 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Nov-2009 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. To raise or lower the head restraint, press the button located on the side of the head restraint and pull up or push the head restraint down, and release the button. Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable. Rear Seats Second Row Seats The vehicles second row seats have head restraints in the outboard seating positions that cannot be adjusted. The second row outboard head restraints are not removable. The second row outboard head restraints are designed to be folded. When folding the second row seatbacks down, the head restraint will automatically fold out of the way as the seat is folded down. The second row outboard head restraints can be folded forward to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151916 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To fold the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5379102 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The head restraint will fold forward automatically. When an occupant or child restraint is in the seat, always return the head restraint to the full upright position. Push the head restraint up and rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked. Third Row Seats The vehicles third row seats have head restraints in the outboard seating positions that cannot be adjusted up or down. The third row outboard head restraints are not removable. The third row outboard head restraints are designed to be folded. When folding the third row seatbacks down, the head restraint will automatically fold out of the way as the seat is folded down. The head restraint can be folded forward to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151917 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To fold the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5379113 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The head restraint will fold forward automatically. When an occupant or child restraint is in the seat, always return the head restraint to the full upright position. Push the head restraint up and rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked. FFront Seats

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152632 Power Seat Adjustment CELL ID: 182698 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Warning: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving. Warning: The power seats will work with the ignition off.Children could operate the power seats and be injured.Never leave children alone in the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151925 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To adjust the seat:

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. If equipped, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152634 CELL ID: 182701 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Oct-2018 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Reclining Seatbacks Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151997 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To recline the seatback:

Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise. Warning: Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1968936 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Dec-2009 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152633 CELL ID: 182699 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Oct-2018 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Lumbar Adjustment

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151922 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) Press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support. If equipped, press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower lumbar support.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5678729 CELL ID: 213391 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Memory Seats

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151929 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) Overview If equipped, the memory seat feature allows drivers to save their unique driving positions and a shared exit position. See Saving Seating Positions later in this section. The saved positions can be recalled manually by all drivers. See Manually Recalling Seating Positions later in this section. Drivers with remote key 1 and 2 can also recall them automatically. See Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall or Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall later in this section. To enable automatic recalls, turn on Seat Entry Memory and/or Seat Exit Memory. See Enable Automatic Recalls under Vehicle Personalization Settings later in this section. The memory recalls may be cancelled at any time during the recall. See Cancel Memory Seating Recalls later in this section. Identifying Driver Number The vehicle identifies the current driver by their remote key number 18. The current remote key number may be identified by Driver Information Center (DIC) welcome message, You are driver x for memory recalls, This message is displayed the first few times the vehicle is turned on when a different remote key is used. For Seat Entry Memory to work properly, save positions to the 1 or 2 memory button matching the driver number of this welcome message. To aid in identifying remote key IDs, it is recommended to only carry one remote key when entering the vehicle. Perform the following if the welcome message is not displayed:

1. Move all remote keys away from the vehicle. 2. Start the vehicle with another remote key. A DIC welcome message should display indicating the driver number of the other remote key. Turn the vehicle off and remove the other remote key from the vehicle. 3. Start the vehicle with the initial remote key. The DIC welcome message should display the driver number of the initial remote key. Saving Seating Positions Read these instructions completely before saving memory positions. To save preferred driving positions to 1 and 2:

2. Adjust all available memory features to the desired driving position. 3. Press and release SET; a beep will sound. 1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ACCESSORY. A DIC welcome message may indicate the driver number of the current remote key. See Identifying Driver Number previously in this section. 4. Immediately upon releasing SET, press and hold memory button 1 or 2 matching the current Drivers remote key number until two beeps sound. If too much time passes between releasing SET and pressing 1 or 2, the two beeps will not sound indicating memory position were not saved. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to try again. 5. Repeat Steps 14 for the other remote key 1 or 2 using the other 1 or 2 memory button. It is recommended to save the preferred driving positions to both 1 and 2 if you are the only driver. To save the common exit seating position to B that is used by all drivers for Manually Recalling Seating Positions and Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall features, repeat Steps 14 using B, the exit button. Manually Recalling Seating Positions Press and hold 1, 2, or B button until the recall is complete, to recall the positions previously saved to that button. Manual Memory recall movement for 1, 2 or B buttons may be initiated and will complete to the saved memory position if the vehicle is in or out of P(Park). Enable Automatic Recalls under Vehicle Personalization Settings For Seat Entry Memory that begins movement to the preferred driving position of the 1 or 2 button when the vehicle is turned on, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Seating Position, then Seat Entry Memory, and then Select ON or OFF. See Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall later in this section. For Seat Exit Memory that begins movement to the preferred exit position of the B button when the vehicle is turned off and the driver door is open or opened, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Seating Position, then Seat Exit Memory, and then Select ON or OFF. See Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall later in this section. See Vehicle Personalization for additional setting information. Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall Seat Entry Memory will automatically begin movement to the seating positions of the 1 or 2 button corresponding to the drivers remote key number 1 or 2 detected by the vehicle when:

Seating positions have been previously saved to the same 1 or 2 button. See Saving Seating Positions previously in this section. Seat Entry Memory is enabled. See Enable Automatic Recalls under Vehicle Personalization Settings previously in this section. The vehicle is turned ON. The shift lever is in P (Park). Seat Entry Memory Recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position. If the saved memory seat position does not automatically recall, verify the recall is enabled. See Enable Automatic Recalls under Vehicle Personalization Settings previously in this section. If the memory seat recalls to the wrong position, the drivers remote key number 1 or 2 may not match the memory button number positions they were saved to. Try the other remote key or try saving the positions to the other 1 or 2 memory button. See Saving Seating Positions previously in this section. Automatic Seat Entry Memory recalls are only available for drivers remote key numbers 1 and 2. Remote keys 38 will not provide Seat Entry Memory recalls. Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall Seat Exit Memory will begin movement to the seating position of the B button when:

The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is open or opened within a short time. A seating position has been previously been saved to the B memory button. See Saving Seating Positions previously in this section Seat Exit Memory is enabled. See Enable Automatic Recalls under Vehicle Personalization Settings previously in this section. The shift lever is in P (Park). Seat Exit Memory recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position. Seat Exit Memory is not linked to the drivers remote key. The seating position saved to B is used for all drivers. Cancel Memory Seating Recalls During any memory recall:

Press a power seat control Press SET memory button During Manual memory recall:

Release 1, 2, or B memory button During Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall:

Turn vehicle off Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons During Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall:

Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons Obstructions Heated Front Seats If something has blocked the seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the recall again. If the memory position still does not recall, see your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5415775 CELL ID: 182704 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Warning: If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5415800 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Sep-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) If equipped, the buttons are near the climate controls on the center stack. To operate, the engine must be running. Press I or + to heat the driver or passenger seatback. Press J or z to heat the driver or passenger seat back and cushion. When this feature is off, the heated seat symbols on the buttons are white. When a heated seat is turned on, the symbol turns red. Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30minutes. When the vehicle is on, this feature will automatically activate the heated seats at the level required by the vehicles interior temperature. The active high, medium, low, or off heated seat level will be indicated by the manual heated seat buttons on the center stack. Use the manual heated seat buttons on the center stack to turn auto heated seats off. If the passenger seat is unoccupied, the auto heated seats feature will not activate that seat. The auto heated seats feature can be programmed to always be enabled when the vehicle is on. The passenger seat may take longer to heat up. Auto Heated Seats See Vehicle Personalization. Remote Start Heated Seats During a remote start, the heated seats, if equipped, can be turned on automatically when it is cold outside. If the auto heated seats feature, if equipped, is not turned on, the heated seats may be canceled when the ignition is turned on. If necessary, press the heated seat button to use the heated seats after the vehicle is started. The heated seat indicator lights may turn on during a remote start. The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal. The remote start heated seats may be enabled or disabled in the vehicle personalization menu. See Remote Vehicle Start and Vehicle Personalization. CELL ID: 182714 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2016 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle. This feature will activate when a second row door is openedwhile the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat. The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off. The feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152622 CELL ID: 182718 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) RRear Seats

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4508336 Rear Seats Rear Seat Reminder Second Row Seats Rear Seat Adjustment

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151937 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Remove objects on the floor in front of or on the second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor. 2. Lift the lever below the seat cushion and slide the seat forward or backward. To adjust the seat position:

Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151946 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to the upright position:

Warning: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 1. Lift the lever fully while applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position. If the lever is lifted without applying pressure, the seat will release to a folded position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Entering and Exiting the Third Row Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Warning: Do not leave the second row seat in a tumbled position while the vehicle is in motion. A tumbled seat is not locked. It can move when the vehicle is in motion. People in the vehicle could be injured in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position before driving the vehicle. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. Caution: Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. The second row seats can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seat. Folding and Tumbling the Seat To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151946 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 2. Lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151947 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Jul-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The seatback will fold forward to create a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the upright position.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151948 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Jul-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Folding and Tumbling the Seat from the Third Row Seat To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Warning: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151949 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 2. Pull the strap on the bottom rear of the second row seat to release the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151948 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Jul-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 3. Pull the strap again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Automatic Fold and Tumble Feature Warning: Do not leave the second row seat in a tumbled position while the vehicle is in motion. A tumbled seat is not locked. It can move when the vehicle is in motion. People in the vehicle could be injured in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position before driving the vehicle. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. Warning: Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release switch. Caution: Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. The vehicle must be in P(Park) for this feature to work. Folding and Tumbling the Seat To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151959 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 2. Press the automatic seat release switch on the panel behind the rear doors. The seatback automatically folds flat. 3. Press the switch again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat from the Cargo Area The vehicle must be in P(Park) for this feature to work.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151960 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Second Row Power Seat Fold and Tumble Switches 2. Third Row Power Seat Fold and Raise Switches To fold and tumble the seat from the cargo area:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. 2. Press the switch(1) on the side trim of the cargo area to fold the second row seatback. The left switch folds the left seatback, and the right switch folds the right seatback. 3. Press the switch again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. The switches(2) can be used to fold the third row seatbacks from the cargo area. See Third Row Seats. Returning the Seat to the Sitting Position Warning: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. To return the seat to the sitting position from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. For the 60/40split-bench seat, make sure the seat belt in the center seating position is not caught between the two seats and is not twisted.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5415821 CELL ID: 182716 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) 2. 3. Heated Rear Seats Warning: If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. See the Warning under Heated Front Seats.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151943 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The buttons are on the rear of the center console. With the engine running, press M or L to heat the left or right outboard seat cushion. An indicator on the rear climate control display appears when this feature is on. Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high for an extended time, their level may automatically be lowered.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152623 CELL ID: 182719 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Jul-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Third Row Seats Caution: Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. The third row seatbacks can be folded to increase cargo space. 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the third row seat. 2. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. 3. If the second row seat is in the full rear position, adjust it forward to allow the third row seat to fold fully flat.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2875683 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Aug-2012 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) 4. Disconnect the rear seat belt mini-

latch, using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, and let the belt retract into the headliner.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4051304 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Jan-2015 OWNER: Ostrowski, Kasia) 5. Stow the mini-latch in the holder in the headliner.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5379070 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 6. Stow the seat belt in the belt stowage clip. Repeat the steps to fold the other seatback, if desired. Power Seatback Folding (If Equipped) The vehicle must be in P(Park) for this feature to work.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151960 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Second Row Power Seat Fold and Tumble Switches 2. Third Row Power Seat Fold and Raise Switches 1. Press and hold the switch(2) on the side trim of the cargo area to fold the third row seatback. The left switch folds the left seatback, and the right switch folds the right seatback. 2. Repeat the steps for the other seatback, if desired. The switches(1) can be used to fold or fold and tumble the second row seats from the cargo area. See Second Row Seats. Returning the Third Row Seatback to the Upright Position

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151960 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Second Row Power Seat Fold and Tumble Switches 2. Third Row Power Seat Fold and Raise Switches To return the third row seatback to the upright position:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5379070 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 1. Ensure the seat belt is in the belt stowage clip. 2. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 3. Press and hold the switch(2) on the side trim of the cargo area to raise the third row seatback. The left switch raises the left seatback, and the right switch raises the right seatback. Warning: A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. 4. Reconnect the center seat belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let it twist. 5. Pull on the seat belt to be sure the mini-latch is secure. 6. Repeat the steps for the other seatback, if desired. Manual Seatback Folding (If Equipped)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151954 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Pull up on the lever to release the seatback. 2. Push the seatback forward to lay flat. 3. Repeat for the other seatback, if necessary. Returning the Third Row Seatback to the Upright Position

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5379070 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 1. Ensure the seat belt is in the belt stowage clip. 2. From the rear of the vehicle, raise the seatback to the upright position using the pull strap on the back of the third row seat, or lift the seatback and push it into place from inside the vehicle. Warning: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. Warning: A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. 4. Reconnect the center seat belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let it twist. 5. Pull on the seat belt to be sure the mini-latch is secure. Folding the Third Row Seats from the Overhead Console

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151939 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To fold the seats from the overhead console, if equipped:

The vehicle must be in P(Park) for this feature to work. 1. Press and hold the switch to fold the third row seatback. The left switch folds the left seatback, and the right switch folds the right seatback. 2. Repeat the steps for the other seatback, if desired. 3. Press and hold the switch to return the seatback to the seating position. If the red light on the switch is illuminated, the third row seatback is not in the seating position. There are additional switches which can be used to fold the third row seatbacks from the cargo area. See Third Row Seats. SSeat Belts

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4488907 Seat Belts CELL ID: 278388 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do. Warning: Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too. This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders. Why Seat Belts Work

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966609 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense. Questions and Answers About Seat Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?

A: You could be whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. Also, in nearly all regions, the law requires wearing seat belts.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5598919 CELL ID: 278389 MODIFIED DATE: 01-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) How to Wear Seat Belts Properly Follow these rules for everyone's protection. There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children or Infants and Young Children. Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts. There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966371 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible). Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. Warning: You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4829733 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jul-2017 OWNER: Rogers-Caleel, Donna)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966375 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966374 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966386 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966373 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966377 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest. Warning: The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces. Warning: You can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind your back, under your legs, or wrapped around your neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around you. You may have to cut the seat belt if it is locked and tightened around you.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5294809 CELL ID: 278390 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable seat belt and the seat belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats for instructions on reconnecting the seat belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see Seats in the Index.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1877328 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems. If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases. Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1877330 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. Position the release button on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966390 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Dec-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2153135 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Dec-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer. Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger positions. Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. See How to Wear Seat Belts Properly.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5131424 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Aug-2018 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Push the release button to move the height adjuster to the desired position. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position. Seat Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle's seat belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash. Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware. Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head. Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the comfort guides.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4364328 CELL ID: 278392 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966380 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4838789 CELL ID: 278395 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Safety System Check Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash. Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by reversing the latch plate on the webbing. If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4838817 CELL ID: 278396 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders. Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care. Seat Belt Care Keep belts clean and dry. Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained. Seat belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary, exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system. Warning: Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4364844 CELL ID: 278397 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash Warning: A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash. Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light. CELL ID: 182754 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) AAirbag System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5294811 Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags:

A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger A front center airbag for the driver and front outboard passenger A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger A roof-rail airbag for the driver and for the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the driver A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the front outboard passenger All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger. For the front center airbag, the word AIRBAG is on the inboard side of the driver seatback. For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door. For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:

Warning: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?. Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are supplemental restraints to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Warning: Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the front center armrest or console in vehicles with a front center airbag. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. Warning: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children or Infants and Young Children.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971498 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5294812 CELL ID: 182758 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Where Are the Airbags?

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2049089 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2217986 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Dec-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2908963 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Sep-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) The front center airbag is in the inboard side of the driver seatback. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2048659 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Dec-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3339994 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Sep-2013 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second and third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. Warning: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat or console accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag or the front center airbag. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5400415 CELL ID: 182759 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) When Should an Airbag Inflate?

This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design. Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest. Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide. Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or many side impacts. In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. The front center airbag, if equipped, is designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending upon the location of the impact, when either side of the vehicle is struck. In addition, the front center airbag is designed to inflate when the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side. The front center airbag is not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes, depending on the location of the impact. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in rollovers or in rear impacts. The driver side seat-mounted side impact airbag is not designed to inflate in frontal impacts or in near frontal impacts. The passenger side seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal impacts or in near frontal impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck, if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or the repair costs.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2568322 CELL ID: 182760 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) What Makes an Airbag Inflate?

For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags?. How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5283643 CELL ID: 182761 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4375301 CELL ID: 182762 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Mar-2017 MODIFIED BY: Rogers-Caleel, Donna) What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?

After frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. The front center airbag and roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags?. The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. Warning: When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the ignition off and then on again, the fuel system will return to normal operation; the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features. If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal. Warning: A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred. In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy and Event Data Recorders. Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152886 CELL ID: 182777 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Passenger Sensing System

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3955630 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jul-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. The symbols for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag should be allowed to inflate or not. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size. Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates. Warning: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if:

The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied. The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is active. For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a seat belt properlywhether or not there is an airbag for that person. Warning: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light for more information, including important safety information. If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if the system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit:

3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat). Make sure the seat belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint, even if the child restraint is equipped with a seat belt lock off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor. 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints. 6. Restart the vehicle. The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the childs size. It is better to secure child restraints in a rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the on indicator is not lit. If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2048779 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for twoto threeminutes after the on indicator is lit. Warning: If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag off indicator is lit. Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Seat belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See Seat Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat. Warning: Stowing articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2377159 CELL ID: 182779 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Feb-2018 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. Warning: For up to 10seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4894377 CELL ID: 182780 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Nov-2017 MODIFIED BY: Rogers-Caleel, Donna) Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal may keep the airbag system from working properly. The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing, including improperly repairing or replacing, any parts of the following:

Airbag system, including airbag modules, front or side impact sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, airbag wiring, or front center console Front seats, including stitching, seams or zippers Seat belts Steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling trim, or pillar garnish trim Inner door seals, including speakers Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag modules and sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring along with the proper replacement procedures. In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System. If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels for additional important information. If the vehicle must be modified because you have a disability and have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, see your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2867378 CELL ID: 182781 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Airbag System Check The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light. Caution: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags?. See your dealer for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2165195 CELL ID: 182782 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Dec-2016 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash Warning: A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service. If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light. CChild Restraints

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5317635 Older Children CELL ID: 182803 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Apr-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974657 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicles seat belts. The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:

Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear seat belt comfort guide, if available. See Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Can proper seat belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to wear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use seat belts properly. Warning: Never allow more than one child to wear the same seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A seat belt must be used by only one person at a time.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974662 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Warning: Never allow a child to wear the seat belt shoulder belt under both arms or behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966378 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5664363 CELL ID: 182804 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. Warning: Children can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind their back, under their legs, or wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around the child. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to improperly wear, or play with, the seat belts. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither the vehicles seat belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Warning: Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40km/h(25mph), a 5.5kg(12lb) infant will suddenly become a 110kg(240lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate child restraint.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974669 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) Warning: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If a forward-facing child restraint must be secured in the front passenger seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. If a child restraint is installed in the second row center seat, move the second row seat to the rearward position, whenever possible, to minimize contact with the front center airbag.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966383 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats. There are three basic types of child restraints:

Forward-facing child restraints Rear-facing child restraints Belt-positioning booster seats The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used. For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. The instruction manual that is provided with the child restraint states the weight and height limitations for that particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of child restraints available for children with special needs. Warning: To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint. Warning: A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle seat belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in an appropriate child restraint.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5412407 CELL ID: 182805 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Child Restraint Systems Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966385 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. Forward-Facing Child Restraint

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966387 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness. Booster Seats

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966384 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle seat belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the seat belt fit test in Older Children. Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle Warning: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraints must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the following:

1. 2. 3. Instruction labels provided on the child restraint Instruction manual provided with the child restraint This vehicle owner's manual The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicleeven when no child is in it. Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint Warning: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5669725 CELL ID: 182806 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position. Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position. The vehicle is equipped with a front center airbag in the inboard side of the driver seat. Even with a front center airbag, a child restraint can be installed in any second row seating position. Danger: NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Danger: When using a child restraint on the front passenger seat, the airbag systems for the front passenger seat must be deactivated; if not, the triggering of the airbags poses a risk of fatal injury to the child. This is especially the case if rear-facing child restraints are used on the front passenger seat. Warning: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. See Passenger Sensing System for additional information. If a child restraint is installed in a second row center seat, move the second row seat to the rearward position, whenever possible, to minimize contact with the front center airbag.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3220744 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Dec-2012 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Do not install a child restraint in any rear seating position where it cannot be installed securely. Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent seat belts or ISOFIX anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the seat belt. The seat in front of an installed child restraint should be adjusted to ensure proper installation according to the child restraint manual. When installing a child restraint in an adjustable second row seating position, the seat should be adjusted fore or aft to ensure proper installation according to the child restraint manual. If the seat is able to recline, the seat back should be positioned to its full upright position before installing a child restraint. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it. The following table shows permissible options for fastening a child restraint with a lap-shoulder belt. Child Restraint Suitability Seating Position Seat Position Number 1 2 3 4 Bench Seat Only Seating Position Suitable for Universal Belted (Yes/No) i-Size Seating Position (Yes/No) Seating Positions Suitable for Lateral Fixture (L1/L2) Largest Suitable Rearward Facing Fixture (ISO R1/R2X/R2/R3) 5 6 7 8 9 N/A N/A X Yes No Yes Yes No Yes N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X X X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A R3 R3 R3 N/A N/A N/A Largest Suitable Forward Facing Fixture (F2X/F2/F3) Largest Suitable Booster Fixture (B2/B3) Legend and Footnotes N/A: This ISOFIX seating position does not exist in this vehicle. X: No child restraint permitted in this mass group. Seat Number Position in the Vehicle N/A N/A N/A F3 F3 F3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A B3 B3 B3 B3 X B3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Front Left Front Center Front Right Second Row Left Second Row Center Second Row Right Third Row Left Third Row Center Third Row Right ISOFIX Size Class and Seat Device ISO/F3 : Full-Height Forward Facing toddler CRS ISO/F2 : Reduced-Height Forward Facing toddler CRS ISO/F2X : Reduced-Height Forward Facing toddler CRS ISO/R3 : Full-Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS ISO/R2 : Reduced-Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS ISO/R2X : Reduced-Size Rearward Facing toddler CRS ISO/R1 : Rearward Facing infant CRS ISO/L1 : Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot) ISO/L2 : Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot) B2: Booster seat, reduced width 440mm B3: Booster seat, full width 520mm ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Second Row - Captains Chairs

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5678730 CELL ID: 182809 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151965 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) Second Row - 60/40 Bench

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151966 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The ISOFIX anchors are located near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion and identified with the symbol H. Fasten ISOFIX child restraints to the ISOFIX anchors. Specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint positions are marked in the ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability table. See Where to Put the Restraint. Securing a Child Restraint to the ISOFIX Anchors 1. Position the child restraint on the front of the seat on which it will be installed. 2. Lock the ISOFIX attachments to the ISOFIX anchors following the instructions that came with the child restraint. 3. Ensure the child restraint is securely mounted to the seat. 4. A top tether strap or support leg must be used in addition to the ISOFIX anchors. Top Tether Anchors of Vehicle Second Row - Captains Chairs

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151962 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) Second Row - 60/40 Bench

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151963 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Sep-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The second row top tether anchors are located on the back of the seatbacks for the outboard seating positions and the rear of the seat cushion for the center seating position. Top tether anchors are always aligned with rear seats and identified with symbol }. There are no child restraint ISOFIX provisions located in the third row seats. Do not attach anything other than a child restraint system to the vehicle top tether anchors. Instructions for attaching the child restraint to the top tether anchor:

1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that a top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:

1.1. Find the top tether anchor. 1.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913405 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2010 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913404 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2010 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4294974 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Dec-2015 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) If the position you are using has a fixed head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether around the inboard side of the head restraint.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913400 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2010 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) If the position you are using has a fixed head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the head restraint. If the child restraint is installed next to a center seat, make sure the top tether does not interfere with the center seating position shoulder belt/retractor. If it does, find another suitable seating position to install the child restraint. 2. Make sure the child restraint top tether hook is completely closed and secured to the top tether anchor.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5669727 CELL ID: 182812 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) The vehicle is equipped with a front center airbag in the inboard side of the driver seat. Even with a front center airbag, a child restraint can be installed in any second row seating position. If you install a child restraint in a second row center seat, move the second row seat to the rearward position, whenever possible, to minimize contact with the front center airbag. When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the ISOFIX system, see ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems for how and where to install the child restraint using ISOFIX. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a seat belt and it uses a top tether, see ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the ISOFIX system, you will be using the seat belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint. 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. will show you how. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974674 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. The push button used to release the latch plate must be visible and not obscured by the child restraint. There must not be direct contact of the child restraint to the push button. 4. Follow the instructions in the child restraint owners manual to tighten and lock the child restraint using the vehicle seat belt.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974685 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems. 7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is 5. 6. secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5669744 CELL ID: 182812 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint. In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator for more information, including important safety information. Danger: NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Danger: When using a child restraint on the front passenger seat, the airbag systems for the front passenger seat must be deactivated; if not, the triggering of the airbags poses a risk of fatal injury to the child. This is especially the case if rear-facing child restraints are used on the front passenger seat.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3220744 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Dec-2012 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) If the child restraint uses a top tether, see ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint. The push button used to release the latch plate must be visible and not obscured by the child restraint. There must not be direct contact of the child restraint to the push button. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. will show you how. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2325802 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Dec-2012 OWNER: Lerma, Theresa) Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt, if needed.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974674 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974681 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1974685 To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) 6. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6. 7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. Storage SStorage Compartments

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2887505 Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage CELL ID: 226286 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5255638 CELL ID: 182789 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5255646 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) There is storage on the instrument panel. To open, if the storage is covered, press the button and slide the cover until it locks. To close, press the button and release. The door will close automatically.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2367509 CELL ID: 182790 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Lift up the glove box handle to open it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160145 CELL ID: 182791 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Glove Box Cupholders Bench Seat Cupholders

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5384954 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jul-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) The cupholders are in front of the center console storage area when the armrest is down. See Center Console Storage. Bucket Seat Cupholders

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5384955 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jul-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) There are cupholders in front of and behind the center console storage area. Rear Cupholders

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5387901 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) For second row bench seat, there are cupholders in the armrest. Pull down the armrest to access the cupholders.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5158694 CELL ID: 202897 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Rear Storage

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5158636 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) There is storage in the floor of the rear cargo area. Lift the handle to access.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5421015 CELL ID: 182798 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Center Console Storage Bench Seat

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159132 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159133 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) If equipped, pull the front center seat armrest down to access the storage area with cupholders. Press the button and lift to open. There may be a removable divider inside. Bucket Seat

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5156160 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) If equipped, press the latch and lift to open. Depending on the options, there may be a removable storage tray, auxiliary jack, and USB port(s) inside.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160586 CELL ID: 182799 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Floor Console Storage

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159127 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) If equipped with front center seat storage, unlock with the mechanical key inside the remote key. See Keys. Press the latch, and lift to open. AAdditional Storage Features CELL ID: 182844

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5158719 Cargo Tie-Downs MODIFIED DATE: 21-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5158630 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) There are two cargo tie-downs in the rear cargo area. These can be used to strap cargo down and keep it from moving inside the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5401772 CELL ID: 182848 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Convenience Net

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5401764 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Sep-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) This vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo tie-downs for storing small loads.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4635659 CELL ID: 182852 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Do not use the net to store heavy loads. Warning Triangle The warning triangle is stored in the rear of the vehicle. RRoof Rack System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5670538 Roof Rack System CELL ID: 182854 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy) The vehicle may be equipped with side-rails for a roof rack system. Cargo must be secured with properly installed cross rails and other accessories designed to carry cargo. These can be purchased from your dealer. Warning: Before driving and occasionally during a trip, check that cargo is securely fastened, rests evenly between the cross rails and does not block the vehicle's lamps or windows. Never load cargo directly on the roof of the vehicle or allow cargo to hang over the rear or sides of the vehicle. Never load cargo without first properly installing cross rails and other accessories designed to carry cargo. Personal injury, death or damage to the vehicle or other property may occur. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Cargo Weight Limits Do not exceed the maximum cargo weight for the roof rack system, including the weight of the cross rails and any other accessories used to carry the cargo such as bike racks or roof boxes. The maximum cargo weight that can be loaded onto the roof rack system is 100kg (220lb) or the weight designated in the instructions that came with the cross rails or other roof rack accessories, whichever is less. Warning: Never load the roof rack with more weight than specified in this section. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle's center of gravity higher. To avoid losing control of the vehicle, avoid overloading, high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers when carrying cargo on the roof rack. The weight of any cargo carried on the roof rack system must be included in calculating the loaded weight of the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle, including cargo carried on the roof rack system and passengers and cargo carried in the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits. A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located above the rear window glass. Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do not block or damage the CHMSL. Instruments and Controls CControls

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5423330 Steering Wheel Adjustment Power Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel CELL ID: 182828 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151969 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To adjust the steering wheel, if equipped:

1. Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down. 2. Press the control rearward or forward to move the steering wheel closer or away from you.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5320015 CELL ID: 182829 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) The infotainment system can be operated by using the steering wheel controls. See Steering Wheel Controls.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5568515 CELL ID: 182830 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Strickland, Jayne) Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Steering Wheel Controls Heated Steering Wheel

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151980 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Oct-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) If equipped, press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. An indicator next to the button is lit when the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating. Automatic Heated Steering Wheel If equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel may turn on during a remote start along with the heated seats when it is cold outside. The heated steering wheel indicator may come on in remote start. If equipped with auto heated seats, the heated steering wheel will turn on when the auto heated seat is activated. The heated steering wheel indicator will display the state of the steering wheel heat.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2343635 CELL ID: 182831 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5420653 CELL ID: 182832 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) See Heated Front Seats and Vehicle Personalization. Horn To sound the horn, press a on the steering wheel. Windshield Wiper/Washer

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5399569 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the windshield wiper lever to select the wiper speed. 1X : For a single wipe, briefly move the wiper lever down. For several wipes, hold the wiper lever down. OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. If equipped with Rainsense, use this setting for intermittent wipes when Rainsense is disabled, or Rainsense wipes when Rainsense is enabled. For c:

intermittent wipes, move the windshield wiper lever to AUTO, then turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. If Rainsense is turned on, see Rainsense later in this section. LO: Use for slow wipes. HI: Use for fast wipes. f : Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the lever is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the windshield wiper lever is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer has been activated. See Washer Fluid for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and windshield before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement. Warning: In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Warning: Before driving the vehicle, always clear snow and ice from the hood, windshield, washer nozzles, roof, and rear of the vehicle, including all lamps and windows. Reduced visibility from snow and ice buildup could lead to a crash. If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are on LO, HI, or AUTO with Rainsense turned off, they will immediately stop. If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield. If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing or Rainsense, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield. Wiper Parking Rainsense If equipped with Rainsense and the feature is turned on, a sensor near the top center of the windshield detects the amount of water on the windshield and controls the frequency of the windshield wiper based on the current sensitivity setting. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5399578 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) AUTO : Move the windshield wiper lever to AUTO. Turn the band on the wiper lever to adjust the sensitivity. Turn the band up for more sensitivity to moisture. Turn the band down for less sensitivity to moisture. Move the windshield wiper lever out of the AUTO position to deactivate Rainsense. To turn the Rainsense feature on or off, see Rain Sense Wipers under Vehicle Personalization. Wiper Arm Assembly Protection When using an automatic car wash, move the windshield wiper lever to OFF. This disables the automatic Rainsense windshield wipers. With Rainsense, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the wipers will automatically stop at the base of the windshield. The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased. Windshield Washer L m: Push the paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the turn signal lever to spray washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the paddle is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the paddle is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer had been activated. See Washer Fluid for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5485238 CELL ID: 182835 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Rear Window Wiper/Washer

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5399584 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) The rear wiper control is on the turn signal lever. To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper position. OFF: Turns the wiper off. INT: Turns on the rear wiper with a delay between wipes. ON: Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR: Press this button on the end of the lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the button. The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper returns to the parked position and stops. Rear Wiper Arm Assembly Protection When using an automatic car wash, move the rear wiper control to OFF to disable the rear wiper. In some vehicles, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the rear wiper will automatically park under the rear spoiler. The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased. Reverse Gear Wipes If the rear wiper control is off, the rear wiper will automatically operate continuously when the shift lever is in R (Reverse), and the front windshield wiper is performing low or high speed wipes. If the rear wiper control is off, the shift lever is in R (Reverse), and the front windshield wiper is performing interval wipes, then the rear wiper automatically performs interval wipes. This feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization. The windshield washer reservoir is used for the windshield and the rear window. Check the fluid level in the reservoir if either washer is not working. See Washer Fluid.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4962002 CELL ID: 182839 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Compass Clock Power Outlets The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center(DIC). The compass receives its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System(GPS) antenna, Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and vehicle speed information. The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5320017 CELL ID: 182840 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Set the time and date using the infotainment system. See "Time / Date" under Settings.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152672 CELL ID: 182841 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player. The vehicle has one 12 Volt accessory power outlet under the climate control system and one 220/230 Volt Alternating Current outlet on the back of the center console. Lift the cover to access and replace when not in use. Power Outlet 12 Volt Direct Current

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5389181 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) Caution: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amp rating. Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. Caution: Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords. Power Outlet 220/230 Volt Alternating Current The 220/230 volt power outlet is on the back of the center console.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5389193 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Aug-2019 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) When the ignition is on, power to the 220 Volt outlet is enabled after the &v110enable button is pressed, see Instrument Panel Overview for button location. A green indicator light on the button indicates when the 220 Volt outlet is enabled. 220 Volt power is supplied to the outlet when it is enabled and electrical equipment is plugged into that outlet. One power outlet can be used with electrical equipment that uses a maximum of 400 watts. Ensure that all connected devices do not exceed 400 watts. The power outlet can be turned off by pressing the &v110enable button. An indicator light on the outlet illuminates when the system is enabled and no system fault is detected. The outlet will not provide power when the ignition is off, the

&v110enable button is not pressed, or the plug is not fully seated into the outlet. The outlet does not operate while the engine is starting. If a USB powered streaming device is being used, it is suggested to use a USB port for power. See USB Port. If uninterrupted power supply is required while driving, disable the auto-stop feature. See Stop/Start System. If equipment is connected using more than 400 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light will flash. Do not use a power outlet with a missing or damaged cover. The power outlet is not designed for the following, and may not work properly if they are plugged in:

Equipment with high initial peak wattage, such as compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets and touch sensor lamps

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5670286 CELL ID: 271018 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Medical equipment Wireless Charging The vehicle has wireless charging in the bin below the climate control system. The system operates at 145 kHz and wirelessly charges one Qi compatible smartphone. The power output of the system is capable of charging at a rate up to 3 amp (15W), as requested by the compatible smartphone. Warning: Wireless charging may affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system. The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. The wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP, during a Bluetooth phone call, or when phone projection (e.g. Apple CarPlay / Android Auto) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP). The operating temperature is 40C (40F) to 85C (185F) for the charging system and 0C (32F) to 35C (95F) for the phone. Warning: Remove all objects from the charger before charging your compatible smartphone. Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the smartphone and charger may become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the smartphone and charger, remove the smartphone and allow the object to cool before removing it from the charger, to prevent burns.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5151973 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jan-2020 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Confirm the smartphone is capable of wireless charging. 2. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects between the smartphone and charger. 3. Place the smartphone face up against the rear of the charger. To maximize the charge rate, ensure the smartphone is fully seated and centered in the holder with nothing under it. A thick smartphone case may prevent the charger from working, or reduce the charging performance. See your dealer for additional information. 4. A green &charging5 will appear on the infotainment display, next to the phone icon. This indicates that the smartphone is detected. 5. 6. If a smartphone is placed on the charger and &charging5 turns off or turns yellow, remove the smartphone and any objects from the pad. Turn the smartphone 180 degrees and wait a few seconds before placing/aligning it on the pad again. If a smartphone is placed on the charger and &charging5 turns red, the charger and/or the smartphone is overheated. Remove the smartphone and any objects from the charger in order to cool the system. The smartphone may become warm during charging. This is normal. In warmer temperatures, the speed of charging may be reduced. For vehicles with wireless phone projection, the smartphone may overheat during wireless charging. The smartphone may slow down, stop charging, or shut down to protect the battery. The phone may need to be removed from its case to prevent overheating. The &charging5 may flash while the phone is cooling down enough for wireless charging to automatically resume. This is normal. Individual phone performance may vary. Certain Wireless Charging Module product from LG Electronics, Inc. ("LGE") contains the open source software detailed below. Refer to the indicated open source licenses (as are included following this notice) for the terms and conditions of their use. Software Acknowledgements OSS Notice Information To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product. Freescale-WCT library Copyright (c) 2012-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. specific prior written permission. 3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5420767 CELL ID: 182842 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Cigarette Lighter If equipped with a cigarette lighter, it is in the front console bin or below the climate controls. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in, and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself. Caution: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3642824 CELL ID: 182843 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Ashtrays If equipped, the ashtray is in the center console cupholder. Caution: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray. To remove the ashtray, pull it from the cupholder. Push it back down to be sure it is secure. WWarning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4002506 CELL ID: 182875 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5677565 CELL ID: 182877 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Instrument Cluster English Gauge Cluster Shown, Navigation, and Metric Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5423071 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jul-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) 1. Driver Information Center (DIC) 2. Fuel Gauge 3. Speedometer 4. Tachometer Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster If equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the Duramax Diesel Supplement. The cluster display layout can be changed. There are three selectable views:

Gauge: Displays information zones to the left and right of the speedometer. Map: Displays a navigation map. To change the cluster configuration, touch &cluster on the touchscreen to the left of the instrument cluster. Select the desired option from the list. The cluster layout can also be selected using the infotainment display. See Settings. Touchscreen Display

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5646670 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Sep-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve) There is a touchscreen to the left of the instrument cluster. Use it for the following:

Trip Information Touch &tripinfo to view distance and average fuel economy for the current trip. View other trip information by swiping right or left on the touchscreen. Touch and hold &tripinfo to reset the current trip. Instrument Cluster Layout Touch &cluster to view and select the available instrument cluster layouts. Touch HUD to select the height and brightness of the head-up display. The following options can be turned on or off using the infotainment display. See Settings. Head-Up Display (HUD) Speed Information Digital Speedometer Speed Sign Speed Warning Speedometer Odometer Trip Odometer Tachometer The speedometer shows how fast the vehicle is moving in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour(mph). The speedometer cannot be reset. Shows sign information, which comes from a roadway database in the onboard navigation, if equipped. The sign will show when there is no detected speed limit or the system is unavailable. The overspeeding area within the analog gauge is shown red. In digital speedometer, the digital number is shown red.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2150354 CELL ID: 182878 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2739014 CELL ID: 182879 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2274676 CELL ID: 182880 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset. The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4901887 CELL ID: 183064 MODIFIED DATE: 21-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute(rpm). For vehicles with the Stop/Start system, when the ignition is on, the tachometer indicates the vehicle status. When pointing to AUTO STOP, the engine is off but the vehicle is on and can move. The engine could auto start at any time. When the indicator points to OFF, the vehicle is off. When the engine is on, the tachometer will indicate the engines revolutions per minute (rpm). The tachometer may vary by several hundred rpm, during Auto Stop mode, when the engine is shutting off and restarting.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679923 CELL ID: 183065 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Fuel Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5424353 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jan-2020 OWNER: Callens, Rebecca) When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the tank. There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon. Here are three things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:

It takes a little more, or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more, or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner, speeding up or braking. The gauge takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5652306 CELL ID: 183071 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5646143 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Aug-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve) The engine oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in kPa(kilopascals) when the engine is running. This gauge displays on the infotainment display. If show in cluster is selected a digital value is shown on the instrument cluster in zone 2. Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside temperature, coolant temperature, and oil viscosity. On some models, the oil pump will vary engine oil pressure according to engine needs. Oil pressure may change quickly as the engine speed or load varies. This is normal. If the oil pressure warning light or Driver Information Center (DIC) message indicates oil pressure outside the normal operating range, check the vehicle's oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil. Caution: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5423019 CELL ID: 183072 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5501840 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Sep-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) The engine coolant temperature gauge measures the temperature of the vehicle's engine. This gauge displays on the infotainment display. If show in cluster is selected a digital value is shown on the instrument cluster in zone 2. While driving under normal operating conditions, if the needle moves into the red area, the engine is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5652308 CELL ID: 183073 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Transmission Temperature Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5646091 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Aug-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve) The transmission temperature gauge shows the transmission fluid temperature. If the gauge is reading in the red area and/or a message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the vehicle must be stopped and the cause checked. One possible cause is a low fluid level in the transmission. This gauge displays on the infotainment display. If show in cluster is selected a digital value is shown on the instrument cluster in zone 2. Caution: Do not drive the vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating, or the transmission can be damaged. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by the warranty.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5646110 CELL ID: 183077 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Voltmeter Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5646093 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Aug-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve) When the ignition is on, the voltmeter gauge indicates the battery voltage. This gauge displays on the infotainment display. If show in cluster is selected a digital value is shown on the instrument cluster in zone 2. When the engine is running, this gauge shows the condition of the charging system. The gauge can transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading. This is normal. If the vehicle is operating outside the normal operating range, the charging system light comes on. See Charging System Light. The voltmeter gauge may also read lower when in fuel economy mode. This is normal. Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range. If the vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5502762 CELL ID: 278386 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Seat Belt Reminders Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light There is a driver seat belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971490 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the driver seat belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on. Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light The vehicle may have a front passenger seat belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System .

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971462 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Mar-2014 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the front passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may come on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt. Second and Third Row Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light The vehicle may have second and third row passenger seat belt reminder lights.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5502764 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Jul-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) When the vehicle is started, these lights come on solid to remind rear passengers to fasten their seat belt. Then each light may stay on solid or flash, and a chime may come on if the rear passenger remains unbuckled, or becomes unbuckled, when the vehicle is moving. An X indicates the seat belt is not buckled. A check mark indicates the seat belt is buckled. If the all rear passenger seat belts are buckled, neither the chime nor the lights come on. For information on the front seat belt reminder lights, see "Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light" and "Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light" listed previously. The rear passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may come on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5600081 CELL ID: 183084 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Airbag Readiness Light This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. It is located in the instrument cluster. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), the passenger sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971498 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately. Warning: If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away. If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152884 CELL ID: 183087 MODIFIED DATE: 30-May-2019 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System for important safety information. The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3955630 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jul-2014 OWNER: Foster, Cindi) When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light the symbols for on and off for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag. If the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is allowed to inflate. If the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, or if the airbag readiness light is on, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service right away. Warning: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light for more information, including important safety information.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4660625 CELL ID: 183091 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Charging System Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1972013 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message. If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. Find a safe place to stop the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4911081 CELL ID: 183093 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Nov-2017 MODIFIED BY: Owens, Lynnette) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) This light is part of the vehicles emission control on-board diagnostic system. If this light is on while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected and the vehicle may require service. The light should come on to show that it is working when the ignition is in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966759 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Tanner, Norm) Malfunctions are often indicated by the system before any problem is noticeable. Being aware of the light and seeking service promptly when it comes on may prevent damage. Caution: If the vehicle is driven continually with this light on, the emission control system may not work as well, the fuel economy may be lower, and the vehicle may not run smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Caution: Modifications to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system, or the use of replacement tires that do not meet the original tire specifications, can cause this light to come on. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also affect the vehicles ability to pass an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications. If the light is flashing: A malfunction has been detected that could damage the emission control system and increase vehicle emissions. Diagnosis and service may be required. To help prevent damage, reduce vehicle speed and avoid hard accelerations and uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to park. Turn the vehicle off and wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous guidelines and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is on steady: A malfunction has been detected. Diagnosis and service may be required. Check the following:

If fuel has been added to the vehicle using the capless fuel funnel adapter, make sure that it has been removed. See Filling the Tank with a Portable Gas Can under Filling the Tank. The diagnostic system can detect if the adapter has been left installed in the vehicle, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the adapter removed may turn off the light. Poor fuel quality can cause inefficient engine operation and poor driveability, which may go away once the engine is warmed up. If this occurs, change the fuel brand. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Recommended Fuel. If the light remains on, see your dealer. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs If the vehicle requires an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test, the test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2367064 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Connecting devices that are not used to perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service the vehicle may affect vehicle operation. See Add-On Electrical Equipment. See your dealer if assistance is needed. The vehicle may not pass inspection if:

The light is on when the engine is running. The light does not come on when the ignition is in Service Mode. Critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. If this happens, the vehicle would not be ready for inspection and might require several days of routine driving before the system is ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down, or if the vehicle has been recently serviced. See your dealer if the vehicle will not pass or cannot be made ready for the test.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5171164 CELL ID: 183096 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Brake System Warning Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971995 MODIFIED DATE: 25-May-2011 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light comes on and stays on at start up, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The brake system has electric brake boost. Vehicle speed may be limited when the brake system warning light comes on. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or the brake pedal may go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle. Warning: The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5519299 CELL ID: 188226 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Electric Parking Brake Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2198084 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on when the parking brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the parking brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake system. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5652812 CELL ID: 209118 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Sep-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, see your dealer. Service Electric Parking Brake Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2161095 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light may come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If this light stays on or comes on while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Take the vehicle to a dealer as soon as possible. In addition to the parking brake, other safety functions that utilize the EPB may also be degraded. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center

(DIC). See Electric Parking Brake.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679832 CELL ID: 183098 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2040830 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Apr-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This warning light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. Engagement of the 4WD front axle lock will disable ABS and illuminate the ABS warning light. The ABS warning light will turn off when the front axle lock is disengaged. If the light comes on while driving, safely stop as soon as it is possible and turn off the vehicle. Then turn on the vehicle again to reset the system. If the ABS warning light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light stays on. If the ABS warning light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but ABS is not functioning. If both the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light are on, ABS is not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5581864 CELL ID: 183107 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) See Brake System Warning Light. Four-Wheel-Drive Light Auto Mode Shown, Other Modes Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4870246 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Sep-2017 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) If equipped, the four-wheel-drive light displays what mode the vehicle is in. The light will show each mode: 2WD, 4 m, AUTO; 4 n and N. The light will flash when a shift is in progress. Once the shift is complete the light will be steady. If the light turns amber, there may be a malfunction with the four-wheel-drive system. See your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2866975 CELL ID: 229030 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Oct-2015 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) See Four-Wheel Drive. Hill Descent Control Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2440724 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Apr-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) If equipped, the Hill Descent Control light comes on when the system is ready for use. When the light flashes, the system is active.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375357 CELL ID: 264121 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) See Hill Descent Control (HDC). Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3683601 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Feb-2014 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) After the vehicle is started, this light turns off and stays off if LKA has not been turned on or is unavailable. If equipped, this light is white if LKA is turned on, but not ready to assist. This light is green if LKA is turned on and is ready to assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. The LKA light is amber when assisting. This light flashes amber as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, to indicate that the lane marking has been unintentionally crossed. LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if LKA detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering. See Lane Keep Assist (LKA).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5590624 CELL ID: 327565 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Disabled Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2735462 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Nov-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) This indicator will display when Automatic Emergency Braking or Front Pedestrian Braking has been turned off or is currently unavailable due to malfunction. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB). See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System. Vehicle Ahead Indicator

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4819800 CELL ID: 226205 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Jun-2017 MODIFIED BY: Owens, Lynnette)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4665397 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Jan-2017 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4060825 CELL ID: 272210 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System. Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4060705 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Apr-2015 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) If equipped, this indicator will display amber when a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2867180 CELL ID: 183121 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System. Traction Off Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2153969 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Jan-2015 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off. The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off. If StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is turned off, TCS is also turned off. To turn TCS and ESC off and on, see Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. If TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited unless necessary to help protect the driveline from damage. Adjust driving accordingly.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2867182 CELL ID: 194569 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) StabiliTrak OFF Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2040862 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Apr-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off. This light comes on when the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is turned off. If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off. To turn ESC off and on, see Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. If ESC and TCS are off, the systems do not assist in controlling the vehicle. Adjust driving accordingly.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679838 CELL ID: 183133 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1991282 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Jan-2020 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system are not fully operational and may not assist in maintaining control. Adjust driving accordingly. If the condition persists, see your dealer as soon as possible. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display. The light flashes when the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system is actively working. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. The light may also flash when ABS is active. See Antilock Brake System (ABS). Trailer Sway Control Light (Uplevel Cluster)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4911850 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Nov-2017 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This light will flash when Trailer Sway Control is active. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC).

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3232543 CELL ID: 183134 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971507 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off. Caution: The engine coolant temperature warning light indicates that the vehicle has overheated. Driving with this light on can damage the engine and it may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Engine Overheating. The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated. If this happens, pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375941 CELL ID: 254799 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Driver Mode Control Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4540577 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jun-2016 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This light comes on when Sport Mode is selected.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4540562 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Jun-2016 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This light comes on when Snow Mode is selected.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5040135 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Apr-2018 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This light comes on when Terrain Mode is selected.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5040392 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Apr-2018 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This light comes on when Off-Road Mode is selected.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2040823 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5422030 CELL ID: 325889 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) This light comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is selected. Four Corner Air Suspension Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5422054 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) This light comes on when the air suspension is raised to maximum ground clearance height.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5422057 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) This light comes on when the air suspension is raised to increased ground clearance height. It will flash green and give an alert to indicate that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5422060 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) This light comes on when the air suspension is lowered for easy entry and exit from the vehicle. It will flash green and give an alert to indicate that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5422061 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) This light comes on when the air suspension is in Service Mode or Alignment Mode.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4558454 CELL ID: 183137 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) See Four Corner Air Suspension System. Tire Pressure Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1970731 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the vehicle is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS. When the Light Is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated. A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure. When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2867187 CELL ID: 183141 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Engine Oil Pressure Light Caution: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971524 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem. See your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5385267 CELL ID: 183145 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Stewart, Todd) Low Fuel Warning Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2241360 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) A Low Fuel Warning Light near the fuel gauge comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working. For vehicles with a reconfigurable cluster, this light is in the display area and may not come on when the ignition is turned on. It also comes on when the fuel gauge indicator nears empty. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2554324 CELL ID: 183149 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Security Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2326622 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Mar-2012 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The security light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4179835 CELL ID: 183159 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) High-Beam On Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2065302 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Nov-2011 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. IntelliBeam Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4179681 MODIFIED DATE: 07-May-2015 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) This light comes on when the IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5581874 CELL ID: 183164 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Rear Fog Lamp Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2482770 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Jun-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on when the rear fog lamps are on. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Rear Fog Lamps.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5027588 CELL ID: 183165 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Lamps On Reminder

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2029885 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use, except when only the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2204954 CELL ID: 183169 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Oct-2016 MODIFIED BY: Patchak, Roxanne) Cruise Control Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971514 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) For vehicles with cruise control, the cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active. The light turns off when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2221444 CELL ID: 183173 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Door Ajar Light

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971513 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jul-2011 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched. Before driving, check that all doors are properly closed. CELL ID: 183186 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) IInformation Displays

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5677576 Driver Information Center (DIC) The DIC is displayed in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems. DIC information is broken down into three main zones:

Zone 1: A touchscreen display to left of the instrument cluster. Zone 2: Displays on the instrument cluster to the left of the speedometer. Zone 3: Displays on the instrument cluster to the right of the speedometer.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5355302 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Jun-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) y or z: Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the previous or next selection. V: Press the thumbwheel to open a menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset certain displays. DIC Information Display Options Select which info display to view on the DIC through the Settings menu, or by selecting show in cluster in the Vehicle Information on the infotainment display. See Settings or Vehicle Information. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information. DIC Information Displays The following is the list of all possible DIC information displays and their locations. Some of the information displays may not be available for your particular vehicle. Zone 1 Zone 2 Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average Fuel Economy: The Trip display shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers(km) or miles(mi), since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the current trip, touch and hold the touchscreen display when trip odometer is displayed. The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km(mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset along with the trip odometer by touching and holding the touchscreen display when trip odometer is displayed. Time/Date: Displays current date and time information. Average Speed: Shows the average speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour(mph). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value. The average speed can be reset by touching reset in vehicle information screen. Timer: This display can be used as a timer. To start the timer, touch Start while this display is active. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset. To stop the timer, touch Stop briefly while this display is active and the timer is running. To reset the timer to zero, touch and hold Reset while this display is active. Off Road: Displays vehicle pitch and roll information, road wheel angle, and four-wheel drive (4WD) status. Battery Voltage: Shows the current battery voltage. Trailer Brake: On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC. TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0to10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. TRAILER OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed as a bar graph. Dotted lines may appear in the OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected. Oil Life: Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended. See Maintenance Schedule. The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset, see Engine Oil Life System. Fuel Economy: Displays information about current and average fuel economy. Oil Pressure: Shows the engine oil pressure in kPa(kilopascals) or psi(pounds per square inch). Engine Hours: Shows the total number of hours the engine has run. Coolant Temperature: Shows the temperature of the coolant in either degrees Celsius(C) or degrees Fahrenheit(F). Transmission Fluid Temperature: Shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius(C) or degrees Fahrenheit(F). Air Filter Life: Shows an estimate of the engine air filters remaining useful life and the state of the system. Engine Air Filter Life 95% means 95% of the current air filter life remains. Messages will display based on the engine air filter life and the state of the system. When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the time of the next oil change. When the REPLACE SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience. The Air Filter Life display must be reset after the engine air filter replacement. To reset, see Engine Air Filter Life System. Brake Pad Life: This displays an estimate of the remaining life of the front and rear brake pads.Messages will display based on brake pad wear and the state of the system. Reset the Brake Pad Life display after replacing the brake pads.See Brake Pad Life System. Tire Pressure: Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal(kPa) or in pounds per square inch(psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation. Off: Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas. Zone 3 Audio Now Playing: Displays the actively playing audio. Navigation: Displays a variety of navigation information. Audio and Navigation: Displays both audio and navigation information together. Off: Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas. Vehicle Information The following are all possible vehicle information features. The Vehicle Information App will display 3 cards per page. The currently displayed page of cards is remembered from the last ignition cycle. The menu may contain the following cards:

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5427443 CELL ID: 326216 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) To access the vehicle information menu, press T on the Multi Function Controller (MFC) or touch T from the list of home page icons displayed on the left side of the infotainment display. Notifications Oil Life Tire Pressure Fuel Economy Average Speed Traffic Sign Memory Timer Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fuel Filter Life Off-Road Engine Hours Battery Voltage Oil Pressure Trailer Brake Coolant Temperature Transmission Fluid Temp Air Filter Life Brake Pad Life Traction and Stability Time and Date VVehicle Messages

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5423426 Vehicle Messages CELL ID: 183193 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Callens, Rebecca) Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another. The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing V. The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed. All messages should be taken seriously; clearing the message does not correct the problem. If a SERVICE message appears, see your dealer. Follow the instructions given in the messages. The system displays messages regarding the following topics:

Service Messages Fluid Levels Vehicle Security Brakes Steering Ride Control Systems Driver Assistance Systems Cruise Control Lighting and Bulb Replacement Wiper/Washer Systems Doors and Windows Seat Belts Airbag Systems Engine and Transmission Tire Pressure Battery Four Corner Air Suspension System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5389388 CELL ID: 183204 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Engine Power Messages REDUCED ACCELERATION DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the vehicle's propulsion power is reduced. A reduction in propulsion power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no observed reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. Under certain conditions the performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, or displays repeatedly, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible. Under certain operating conditions, propulsion will be disabled. Try restarting after the ignition has been off for two minutes.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679827 CELL ID: 183223 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) Vehicle Speed Messages SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/H (MPH) This message shows that the vehicle speed has been limited to the speed displayed. The limited speed is a protection for various propulsion and vehicle systems, such as lubrication, thermal, brakes, suspension, Teen Driver if equipped, or tires.

(If equipped with a diesel engine, see the Duramax Diesel supplement.) For Diesel VVehicle Personalization

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5414368 Vehicle Personalization CELL ID: 183231 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) The following are all possible vehicle personalization features. Depending on the vehicle, some may not be available. For System, Apps, and Personal features and functions, see Settings. To access the vehicle personalization menu:

Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page of the infotainment display. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch Vehicle to display a list of available options. Touch to select the desired feature setting. Touch 9 or R to turn a feature off or on. Touch z to go to the top level of the Settings menu. This allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle. The menu may contain the following:

Rear Seat Reminder Touch Off or On. Climate and Air Quality Touch and the following may display:

Auto Fan Speed Auto Heated Seats Auto Defog Auto Rear Defog Auto Fan Speed Touch Low, Medium, or High. Auto Heated Seats Touch Off or On. Auto Defog Touch Off or On. Auto Rear Defog Touch Off or On. Collision/Detection Systems Touch and the following may display:

Forward Collision System This setting specifies the amount of airflow when the climate control fan setting is Auto Fan. This setting automatically turns on and regulates the heated seats when the cabin temperature is cool. The auto heated seats can be turned off by using the heated seat buttons on the center stack. See Heated Front Seats. If equipped with the auto heated steering wheel, this feature will turn on when the auto heated seats turn on. This setting automatically directs air to the windshield to assist in defogging, based on temperature and humidity conditions. This setting automatically turns the rear defogger on based on temperature and humidity conditions. This setting can alert of a potential crash with a detected vehicle ahead and can apply brakes to help reduce a collisions severity. This feature may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians. See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System. This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Lane Change Alert (LCA). This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing. Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols This setting enables the Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing. This allows the Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature to be turned on or off. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing. This setting specifies if alerts will display when the vehicle detects pedestrians behind when in R (Reverse). See Rear Pedestrian Alert. Front Pedestrian Detection Lane Change Alert Park Assist Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols Rear Cross Traffic Alert Rear Pedestrian Detection Forward Collision System Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake. Front Pedestrian Detection Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake. Lane Change Alert Touch Off or On. Park Assist Select Off or On. Touch Off or On. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Touch Off or On. Rear Pedestrian Detection Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake. Comfort and Convenience Touch and the following may display:

Automatic Entry/Egress Assist Chime Volume Hands Free Liftgate/Trunk Control Reverse Tilt Mirror Remote Mirror Folding Rain Sense Wipers Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Automatic Entry/Egress Assist This feature specifies if the vehicle will automatically lower to make it easier to enter or exit the vehicle. Touch Off or On. Chime Volume This determines the chime volume level. Touch the controls on the infotainment display to adjust the volume. Hands Free Liftgate/Trunk Control Touch Off, On-Open and Close, or On-Open Only. Reverse Tilt Mirror The liftgate may be operated with a kicking motion under the left corner of the rear bumper. See Liftgate. When on, the driver, passenger, or both driver and passenger outside mirrors will tilt downward when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) to improve visibility of the ground near the rear wheels. They may move from their tilted position when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) or turned off. See Reverse Tilt Mirrors. Touch Off, On - Driver and Passenger, On - Driver, or On - Passenger. When on, the outside mirrors will remotely fold or unfold when the Remote Key Q or K button is pressed and held. See Folding Mirrors. This setting automatically turns on the wipers when moisture is detected and the wiper switch is in intermittent mode. When on and the front wiper is on, the rear wiper will automatically activate when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). Remote Mirror Folding Touch Off or On. Rain Sense Wipers Touch Disabled or Enabled. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Touch Off or On. Lighting Touch and the following may display:

Vehicle Locator Lights Exit Lighting Automatic High Beam Assist Vehicle Locator Lights Touch Off or On. Exit Lighting This setting flashes the vehicles headlamps when K is pressed on the Remote Key. This setting specifies how long the headlamps stay on after the vehicle is turned off and exited. Touch Off, 30Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120Seconds. Automatic High Beam Assist Touch IntelliBeam or Adaptive Headlight System. Power Door Locks Touch and the following may display:

This setting specifies how the high beams adjust based on the vehicle environment. See Exterior Lamp Controls. This setting allows selection of which doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P(Park). When on, this feature will delay the locking of the doors. To override the delay, press the power door lock switch on the door. Auto Door Unlock Delayed Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Touch Off, All Doors, or Driver Door. Delayed Door Lock Touch Off or On. Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start Touch and the following may display:

Remote Unlock Light Feedback Remote Lock Feedback Remote Door Unlock Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Remote Window Operation Passive Door Unlock Passive Door Lock Remote Left in Vehicle Alert Remote Removed from Vehicle Alert Remote Unlock Light Feedback Touch Off or Flash Lights. Remote Lock Feedback Touch All Doors or Driver Door. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Touch Off or On. Remote Window Operation Touch Off or On. Passive Door Unlock When on, the exterior lamps will flash when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Key. This allows selection of what type of feedback is given when locking the vehicle with the Remote Key. Touch Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Only, or Horn Only. Remote Door Unlock This allows selection of which doors will unlock when pressing K on the Remote Key. If equipped and turned on, this feature will turn on the heated seats when using remote start on cold days. See Heated Front Seats and Remote Vehicle Start. If equipped with Auto Heated Steering Wheel, this feature will turn on when the Remote Start Auto Heated Seats turn on. If equipped, this feature enables remote operation of the windows with the Remote Key. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. This allows the selection of what doors will unlock when using the button on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. This allows passive locking to be turned on or off and selects feedback. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. Touch Off, All Doors or Driver Door Only. Passive Door Lock Touch Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert This feature sounds an alert when the Remote Key is left in the vehicle. Touch Off or On. Remote Removed from Vehicle Alert This feature beeps the horn 3 times when exiting a running vehicle with the Remote Key. This feature specifies if the vehicle will automatically lower to make it easier to enter or exit the vehicle. This feature specifies the position and use of the running boards. See Power Assist Steps. This feature moves the running boards to a deployed position so they can be used with the doors closed. Touch Off or On. Ride Height Touch and the following may display:

Automatic Entry/Egress Automatic Entry/Egress Touch Off or On. Running Boards Touch and the following may display:

Automatic Running Boards Deploy Running Boards Automatic Running Boards Touch Off or On. Deploy Running Boards Touch Off or Deploy. Seating Position Touch and the following may display:

Seat Entry Memory Seat Exit Memory Seat Entry Memory Touch Off or On. Seat Exit Memory Touch Off or On. This feature automatically recalls the previously stored 1 or 2 button positions when the ignition is changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Memory Seats. This feature automatically recalls the previously stored exit button position when the ignition is changed from on or ACC/ACCESSORY to off and the driver door is open. See Memory Seats. Suspension Touch and the following may display:

Service Mode Alignment Mode Service Mode Touch Off or On. Alignment Mode Touch Off or On. Valet Mode To enable valet mode:

This feature disables the air suspension system and is used to prevent unintended raising or lowering of the suspension.. This feature will optimize the vehicle height to provide the most accurate wheel alignment. This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations, if equipped. 1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad. 2. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen. 3. Re-enter the four-digit code. Touch Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the system. Touch Back to go back to the previous menu. UUniversal Remote System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5372804 CELL ID: 183235 Universal Remote System Programming MODIFIED DATE: 10-Aug-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5372669 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jul-2019 OWNER: Miller, Ann) If equipped, these buttons are in the overhead console. This system can replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. These instructions refer to a garage door opener, but can be used for other devices. Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Read these instructions completely before programming the Universal Remote system. It may help to have another person assist with the programming process. Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming. Erase the programming when vehicle ownership is terminated. See Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons later in this section. To program a garage door opener, park outside directly in line with and facing the garage door opener receiver. Clear all people and objects near the garage door. Make sure the hand-held transmitter has a new battery for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. Programming the Universal Remote System For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed outside the U.S.A, Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone. Programming involves time-sensitive actions, and may time out causing the procedure to be repeated. To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons with the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener receiver. 2. Press and release one of the three Universal Remote system buttons to be programmed. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the hand-held transmitter button until the indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash or continuous light. Then release the hand-held transmitter button. Some garage door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the procedure under Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators later in this section. 3. Press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for five seconds while watching the indicator light and garage door activation. If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door moves when the button is pressed, then programming is complete. There is no need to complete Steps 46. If the indicator light does not come on or the garage door does not move, a second button press may be required. For a second time, press and hold the newly programmed button for five seconds. If the indicator light is continuously lit, or the garage door moves, programming is complete. If the indicator light flashes rapidly and the garage door does not move, continue with programming Steps 46. Learn or Smart Button

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2046280 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2010 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 4. After completing Steps 13, locate the Learn or Smart button inside the garage on the garage door opener receiver. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 5. Press and release the Learn or Smart button. Step 6 must be completed within 30 seconds of pressing this button. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained Universal Remote system button for two seconds and release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to three times to complete the training process. The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door. Repeat the process for programming the two remaining buttons. Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed outside the U.S.A, Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone. Some radio-frequency laws and gate operators require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming. If the programming did not work, replace Step 2 under Programming the Universal Remote System with the following:

Press and hold the Universal Remote system button while pressing and releasing the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then change to a rapid flash or continuous solid-light. Proceed with Step 3 under Programming the Universal Remote System to complete.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2877203 CELL ID: 183236 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Oct-2015 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) Press and hold the appropriate Universal Remote system button for at least one-half second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. Universal Remote System Operation Using the Universal Remote System Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons Erase all programmed buttons when vehicle ownership is terminated. To erase:

2. Release both buttons. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. This should take about 10 seconds. Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button To reprogram any of the system buttons:

1. Press and hold any one of the buttons. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 1 under Programming the Universal Remote System. Lighting EExterior Lighting

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5568983 Exterior Lamp Controls CELL ID: 182856 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Rogers-Caleel, Donna)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5567789 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2020 OWNER: Rogers-Caleel, Donna) The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. There are four positions:

O: Turns off the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to O again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, roof marker lamps (if equipped), and license plate lamps.

;: Turns on the parking lamps including all lamps, except the headlamps. 2: Turns on the headlamps with the parking lamps and instrument panel lights. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp control off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes. To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. IntelliBeam System If equipped, this system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions. The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2164850 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Nov-2011 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled. Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam To enable the IntelliBeam system, activate the high/low-beam changer two times within two seconds while the exterior lamp control is in AUTO or 2. Driving with IntelliBeam The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph). The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on. There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance. The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:

The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required. The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph). The IntelliBeam system can be disabled by the High/Low-Beam Changer or the Flash-to-Pass feature. If this happens, the High/Low-Beam Changer must be activated on then off within two seconds to reactivate the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam is reactivated. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer and Flash-to-Pass. The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:

The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected. The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray. The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions. The vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor. The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps. The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads. The automatic high-beam headlamps may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2355190 CELL ID: 182858 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Aug-2012 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Exterior Lamps Off Reminder A reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on, the ignition is off, and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the lamps off.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5412386 CELL ID: 182859 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Push the turn signal lever away from you and release to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2065302 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Nov-2011 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) When the high-beam headlamps are on, this indicator light on the instrument cluster will also be on.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4282481 CELL ID: 182860 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Sep-2015 MODIFIED BY: Parker, Cynthia) Flash-to-Pass This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position. To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it. If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. Depending on the type of headlamp, they will either turn off after a short duration or stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4262367 CELL ID: 182863 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Sep-2015 MODIFIED BY: Parker, Cynthia) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. The dedicated DRL will come on when all of the following conditions are met:

The ignition is on. The exterior lamp control is in AUTO. The light sensor determines it is daytime. When the DRL are on, the taillamps and other lamps will not be on. The DRL turn off when the headlamps are turned to O or the ignition is off.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5539762 CELL ID: 182865 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Automatic Headlamp System When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5503518 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Apr-2020 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. If it is light outside when the vehicle leaves the garage, there is a slight delay before the automatic headlamp system changes to the DRL. During that delay, the instrument cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control. When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is turned to O or the ignition is off. Lights On with Wipers If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Move the exterior lamp control to O or ; to disable this feature.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5417257 CELL ID: 182870 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Hazard Warning Flashers

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5417128 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Sep-2019 OWNER: Richardson, Lamea)

||: Press this button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5503555 CELL ID: 182871 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Turn and Lane-Change Signals

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5503546 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Apr-2020 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the turn signal lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until the lever is released. The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released. If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be burned out. Replace any burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers. If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal. The message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5422042 CELL ID: 182874 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Rogers-Caleel, Donna) Turn Signal On Chime Rear Fog Lamps

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5567789 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2020 OWNER: Rogers-Caleel, Donna) The rear fog lamps make the vehicle more visible from the rear in foggy or misty conditions. ss: Press to turn the rear fog lamps on or off. The parking lamps or headlamps must be on for the rear fog lamps to work. IInterior Lighting

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5670513 Instrument Panel Illumination Control CELL ID: 182892 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5423821 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) This feature adjusts the brightness of all illuminated controls. The instrument panel illumination control is above the exterior lamp control. D: Press the or + to brighten or dim the lights. This feature is functional at night, or when the headlamps or parking lamps are ON.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5670515 CELL ID: 182897 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy) Dome Lamps

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5377669 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) There are dome lamps in the overhead console and the headliner. To change the dome lamp settings, press the following:

j OFF: Press to turn off the dome lamps when any door is opened, K on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or when the ignition is switched off. An indicator light on the button will turn on when the dome lamp override is activated. Press j OFF again to deactivate this feature and the indicator light will turn off. The dome lamps will come on when any door is opened, K on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or when the ignition is switched off. Press and hold any of the overhead console lens to turn all dome lamps on or off manually.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5373314 CELL ID: 182898 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Reading Lamps

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5373309 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) There are reading lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5373311 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) With Sunroof

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5126823 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Apr-2019 OWNER: Lee, Lisa) Press the lens on each reading lamp to turn it on or off. LLighting Features

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5590622 Entry Lighting CELL ID: 183682 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Some exterior lamps turn on briefly at night, or in areas with limited lighting when K is pressed on the remote key. After about 30seconds the exterior lamps turn off. When any door is opened, or remote unlock pressed, the interior lamps come on. They stay on for about 20seconds. When all the doors have been closed, or the ignition is turned on, they gradually fade out. This entry lighting feature for exterior lighting can be changed by vehicle locator lights. See Vehicle Locator Lights under Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5513694 CELL ID: 183684 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) Exit Lighting Some exterior lamps and interior lamps turn on when the driver door is opened after the ignition is turned off. The interior lights turn on when the ignition is turned off. The exterior and interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off. The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off. This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4646184 CELL ID: 183692 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Apr-2017 MODIFIED BY: Rosekrans, Dee) Battery Load Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), which estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery. When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. The voltmeter gauge or the voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped, may show the voltage moving up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed. The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads. A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories. Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed and it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4578054 CELL ID: 183693 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps or reading lamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs:

Battery Power Protection The ignition is turned on. The doors are closed and then re-opened. Exterior Lighting Battery Saver

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3606262 CELL ID: 183694 MODIFIED DATE: 04-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Burdine, Lynn) The exterior lamps turn off about 10minutes after the ignition is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn the exterior lamp control to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position. To keep the lamps on for more than 10minutes, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. Infotainment System IIntroduction

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4918763 Introduction Read the following pages to become familiar with the features. CELL ID: 182917 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning: Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment feature can cause a crash. You or others could be injured or killed. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Limit your glances at the vehicle displays and focus your attention on driving. Use voice commands whenever possible. The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help avoid distraction by disabling some features when driving. These features may gray out when they are unavailable. Many infotainment features are also available through the instrument cluster and steering wheel controls. Before driving:

Become familiar with the operation, center stack controls, steering wheel controls, and infotainment display. Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single control or by using a single voice command. If equipped, ANC reduces engine noise in the vehicles interior. ANC requires the factory-installed audio system, radio, speakers, amplifier (if equipped), induction system, and exhaust system to work properly. Deactivation is required by your dealer if related aftermarket equipment is installed.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5358979 CELL ID: 182919 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) See Distracted Driving. Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) Overview Infotainment System The infotainment system is controlled by using the infotainment display, controls on the center stack, steering wheel controls, and voice recognition.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4922171 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Feb-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) 1. O (Power) Press to turn the power on. Press and hold to turn the power off. Turn to decrease or increase the volume. 2. 7 Press to mute/unmute the system when on. When the power is on and the system is not muted, a quick status pane will display when O is pressed. Pressing O will mute the system and trigger this pane to show a long press is required to actually power down the system. Radio: Press and release to go to the previous station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next strongest previous station or channel. See AM-FM Radio. 3. {

4. 6 5. o BACK 6. V Home Page USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. Press and hold to quickly reverse through a track. Release to return to playing speed. See USB Port or Bluetooth Audio. Press to go to the Home Page. See Home Page later in this section. Press to exit Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. To enter back into Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, press and hold. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. Radio: Press and release to go to the next station or channel. Press and hold to fast seek the next strongest station or channel. USB/Bluetooth: Press to seek the next track. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release to return to playing speed. See USB Port or Bluetooth Audio. The Home Page is where vehicle application icons are accessed. Some applications are disabled when the vehicle is moving. Press to return to the previous display in a menu. Turn to highlight a feature. Press to activate the highlighted feature. The Home Page can be set up to have up to four pages with eight icons per page. Swipe left or right across the display to access the pages of icons. Managing Home Page Icons 1. Touch and hold any of the Home Page icons to enter edit mode. 2. Continue holding the icon and drag it to the desired position. 3. Release your finger to drop the icon in the desired position. 4. To move an application to another page, drag the icon to the edge of the display toward the desired page. 5. Continue dragging and dropping application icons as desired.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5358980 CELL ID: 220707 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Steering Wheel Controls

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4924151 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) If equipped, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. g: Press to answer an incoming call or start voice recognition. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)Bluetooth (Overview). c: Press to decline an incoming call or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4922290 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Feb-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) The favorites and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel. 1. Favorite: When on a radio source, press to select the next or previous audio broadcast favorite. When listening to a media device, press to select the next or previous track.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5360486 CELL ID: 203208 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Feb-2021 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) 2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume. Using the System Touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page. Examples of available sources may include AM, FM, USB, AUX, and Bluetooth. Touch the Phone icon to display the Phone main page. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)Bluetooth (Overview). If equipped, touch the Nav icon to display the navigation map. See Using the Navigation System. If equipped, touch the Users icon to sign in or create a new user profile, and follow the on-screen instructions. Only four user profiles can be active at one time in the vehicle. It may be necessary to remove a profile from the menu before creating or signing into an existing profile. The removed profile can be logged into at a later time. Touch the Settings icon to display the Settings menu. See Settings. If equipped, touch the Apple CarPlay icon to activate Apple CarPlay after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. If equipped, touch the Android Auto icon to activate Android Auto after a supported device is connected. See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto. If equipped, in-vehicle apps are available for download. Touch the Apps icon on the Home Page to begin. Downloading and using in-vehicle apps requires Internet connectivity which can be accessed with a data plan through the vehicles built-in 4G LTE Wi-Fi hotspot, if equipped, or a compatible mobile device hotspot. On most mobile devices, activation of the Wi-Fi hotspot is in the devices Settings menu under Mobile Network Sharing, Personal Hotspot, Mobile Hotspot, or similar. Availability of apps and connectivity varies by vehicle, conditions, and location. Data plan rates apply. Features are subject to change. For more information, see your dealer. Audio Phone Nav Users Settings Apple CarPlay Android Auto Apps Camera If equipped, touch the Camera icon to access the camera application. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing. Shortcut Tray The shortcut tray is near the bottom of the display. It shows up to four applications. Infotainment Display Features Infotainment display features show on the display when available. When a feature is unavailable, it may gray out. When a feature is touched, it may highlight. If equipped, haptic feedback is a pulse that occurs when an icon or option is touched on the display or when controls on the center stack are pressed. Haptic Feedback Infotainment Gestures Use the following finger gestures to control the infotainment system. Touch/Tap

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2910791 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Touch/tap is used to select an icon or option, activate an application, or change the location inside a map. Touch and Hold

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2910792 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Touch and hold can be used to start another gesture, or to move or delete an application. Drag Nudge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2910793 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Drag is used to move applications on the Home Page, or to pan the map. To drag the item, it must be held and moved along the display to the new location. This can be done up, down, right, or left. This feature is only available when vehicle is parked and not in motion.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2910794 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Nudge is used to move items a short distance on a list or a map. To nudge, hold and move the selected item up or down to a new location. Fling or Swipe

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2910795 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Sep-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Fling or swipe is used to scroll through a list, pan the map, or change page views. Do this by placing a finger on the display then moving it rapidly up and down or right and left. Spread Pinch

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4974109 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Feb-2018 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Spread is used to zoom in on a map, certain images, or a web page. Place finger and thumb together on the display, then move them apart.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4974111 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Feb-2018 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Pinch is used to zoom out on a map, certain images, or a web page. Place finger and thumb apart on the display, then move them together. Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays For vehicles with high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays, use a microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that could scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to clean. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5216678 CELL ID: 219038 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Software Updates Over-the-Air Software Updates If equipped, see Updates under Settings for details on software updates. CELL ID: 182970 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Aug-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) RRadio

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5636666 AM-FM Radio Playing the Radio Finding a Station Seeking a Station Tune

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5636692 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2020 OWNER: Binge, Rob) From the Home Page, touch the Radio icon to display the active audio source page. Touch AM, FM, or SiriusXM from the top of the page. From the AM or FM screen, touch @ or 9 on the infotainment display to search for the previous or next strong station.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5636694 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jul-2020 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Touch Z on the infotainment display to display the Tune screen. Enter a station using the keypad. The keypad will gray out entries that do not contribute to a valid frequency and will automatically place a decimal point within the frequency number. Touch o to delete one number at a time. Touch and hold o to delete all numbers. A valid AM or FM station will automatically tune to the new frequency but not close the Tune screen. Touch S on the infotainment display to exit. The list of all available stations are on the right side of the Tune display to browse. Touch to go to that station or touch H to save the station as a favorite. Storing Radio Station Favorites Favorites show in the area at the bottom of the display. AM, FM, or SiriusXM: Favorites can be stored by touching H. This will highlight indicating that it is now saved as a favorite. The number of favorites is displayed automatically. Audio Settings From the AM or FM screen, touch &audsettings to display the following:

Equalizer: Touch to adjust Bass, Midrange, or Treble using the options on the infotainment display. Fade/Balance: Touch to adjust by using the controls on the infotainment display or by tapping/dragging the crosshair. Sound Mode: Touch to display the following:

Normal: Adjusts the audio to provide the best sound for all seating positions. Driver: Adjusts the audio to provide the best sound for the driver. Centerpoint: This setting creates a surround sound from nearly any audio source. Rear: Adjusts the audio to provide the best sound for the rear seat passengers. Bose AudioPilot: This feature adjusts the volume based on the noise in the vehicle and the speed. Touch Off or On. Manage Favorites: Touch to display a list of Audio favorites. Favorites can be moved, renamed, or deleted. To move, touch and hold the favorite, and then drag up or down to rearrange the position. RDS: This allows the Radio Data System (RDS) to be turned on or off. Touch Off or On.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5639216 CELL ID: 188232 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Aug-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Radio Data System (RDS) If equipped, RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can:

Group stations by Category (i.e., Program Type) such as Rock, Jazz, Classical, etc. Display messages from radio stations. This system relies on receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. It is possible that a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. When information is broadcast from a RDS station, the station name or call letters display on the audio screen. Radio text supporting the currently playing broadcast may also appear.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5216726 CELL ID: 182972 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Feb-2019 MODIFIED BY: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Radio Reception Unplug electronic devices from the accessory power outlets if there is interference or static in the radio. FM signals only reach about 16 to 65km (10 to 40mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out. FM AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Some cellular services may interfere with SXM reception causing loss of signal. Mobile Device Usage Multi-Band Antenna Mobile device usage, such as making or receiving calls, charging, or just having the mobile device on may cause static interference in the radio. Unplug the mobile device or turn it off if this happens.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5573592 CELL ID: 183696 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) The roof antenna may be used for radio, navigation, and OnStar, depending on the equipped options. Keep clear of obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it is open, reception can also be affected. AAudio Players

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4889637 Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices CELL ID: 276606 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) When using media devices such as SD cards, USB devices, and mobile devices, consider the source. Untrusted media devices could contain files that affect system operation or performance. Avoid use if the content or origin cannot be trusted.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5412411 CELL ID: 220708 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) The vehicle may be equipped with two USB ports in the center console under the armrest and another two on the center stack. These ports are for data and charging. There may also be two USB ports at the rear of the center console and a USB port on each side of the third row seats for charging only. Caution: To avoid vehicle damage, unplug all accessories and disconnect all accessory cables from the vehicle when not in use. Accessory cables left plugged into the vehicle, unconnected to a device, could be damaged or cause an electrical short if the unconnected end comes in contact with liquids or another power source such as the accessory power outlet. Playing from a USB A USB mass storage device can be connected to the USB port. Audio extensions supported by the USB may include:

When plugging in a USB device, Gracenote service builds voice tags for music. Voice tags allow artists, albums with hard to pronounce names, and nicknames to be used to play music through voice recognition, if equipped. MyMedia is only available when more than one indexed device is connected. It allows access to content from all indexed media sources. MyMedia will show as an available source in the Source page. The USB MP3 players and USB devices connected must comply with the USB Mass Storage Class specification (USB MSC). While indexing, infotainment features may be available. My Media Library USB MP3 Player and USB Devices To play a USB device:

1. Connect the USB. Touch Audio from the Home Page. Touch the More option and then touch the USB device. Use the following when playing an active USB source:

p: Touch to play the current media source. j: Touch to pause playback of the current media source. Touch to seek the beginning of the current or previous track. Touch and hold to reverse quickly through playback. Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays. Touch to seek the next track. USB Port MP3 AAC OGG 3GP Gracenote 2. 3. 7 :

6 :

Touch and hold to advance quickly through playback. Release to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays. When a list of songs, albums, artists, or other types of media displays, the up and down arrows and A-Z appear on the left side. Select A-Z to view a display that will show all letters of the alphabet and select the letter to go to. Touch to view the list of artists stored on the USB. Touch an artist name to view a list of all albums by the artist. To select a song, touch All Songs or touch an album and then touch a song from the list. Playlists:

Artists:

Songs:

Albums:

Genres:

1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Shuffle : Touch the shuffle icon to play music in random order. See Infotainment System Sound Menu under AM-FM Radio. USB Sound Menu USB Browse Menu Touch the up and down arrows to move the list up and down. Touch Browse and the following may display:

Touch to view the playlists stored on the USB. Touch a playlist to view the list of all songs in that playlist. Touch a song from the list to begin playback. Supported playlist extensions are m3u and pls. Touch to display a list of all songs on the USB. To begin playback, touch a song from the list. Touch to view the albums on the USB. Touch the album to view a list of all songs on the album. Touch a song from the list to begin playback. Touch to view the genres on the USB. Touch a genre to view a list of artists. Touch an artist to view albums by that artist. Touch an album to view songs on the album. Touch a song to start playback. Composers:

Touch to view the composers on the USB. Touch a Composer to view a list of albums by that composer. Touch an album or All Songs to view a list of songs. Touch a song from the list to begin playback. Folders:

Touch to view the directories on the USB. Touch a folder to view a list of all files. Touch a file from the list to begin playback. Podcasts: Touch to view the podcasts on the connected Apple device and get a list of podcast episodes. Audiobooks:

1. 2. 3. Touch to view the audiobooks stored on the Apple device. Touch an audiobook to get a list of chapters. Touch the chapter from the list to begin playback. File System and Naming File systems supported by the USB may include:

FAT32 NTFS HFS+

Supported Apple Devices To view supported devices, see my.gmc.com/learn. Storing and Recalling Media Favorites To store media favorites, touch Browse to display a list of media types. Touch one of the following Browse options to save a favorite:

The songs, artists, albums, and genres are taken from the files song information and are only displayed if present. The radio displays the file name as the track name if the song information is not available. Playlists: Touch H next to any playlist to store the playlist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite playlist. The first song in the playlist begins to play. Artists: Touch H next to any artist to store the artist as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite artist. The first song in the artist list begins to play. Songs: Touch H next to any song to store the song as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite song. Albums: Touch H next to any album to store the album as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite album. The first song in the album list begins to play. Genres: Touch H next to any genre to store the genre as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite genre. The first song of the genre begins to play. Podcasts: Touch H next to any podcast to store the podcast as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite podcast. The podcast begins to play. Audiobooks: Touch H next to any audiobook to store the audiobook as a favorite. Touch a saved favorite to recall a favorite audiobook. The first chapter in the audiobook begins to play. Media Playback and Mute USB playback will be paused if the system is muted. If the steering wheel mute control is pressed again, playback will resume. If the source is changed while in mute, playback resumes and audio will unmute.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5344346 CELL ID: 219037 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Bluetooth Audio Music may be played from a paired Bluetooth device. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)Bluetooth (Overview) for help pairing a device. Volume and song selection may be controlled by using the infotainment controls or the mobile device. If Bluetooth is selected and no volume is present, check the volume setting on the infotainment system. Music can be launched by touching Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the display or by touching the More option and then touching the Bluetooth device. To play music via Bluetooth:

1. Power on the device, and pair to connect the device. 2. Once paired, touch Audio from the Home Page, then touch Bluetooth from the recent sources list on the left of the display. Bluetooth Sound Menu See Infotainment System Sound Menu under AM-FM Radio. Manage Bluetooth Devices From the Home Page:

Touch Audio. Touch More. Touch Bluetooth. 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch Devices to add or delete devices. When touching Bluetooth, the radio may not be able to launch the audio player on the connected device to start playing. When the vehicle is not moving, use the mobile device to begin playback. All devices launch audio differently. When selecting Bluetooth as a source, the radio may show as paused on the display. Press play on the device or touch p on the display to begin playback. Browse functionality will be provided where supported by the Bluetooth device. This media content will not be part of the MyMedia source mode. Some smartphones support sending Bluetooth music information to display on the radio. When the radio receives this information, it will check to see if any is available and display it. For more information about supported Bluetooth features, see my.gmc.com/learn. RRear Seat Infotainment

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5323957 Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System CELL ID: 271023 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) If equipped, the system includes two rear USB-C ports, two HDMI ports, two wireless headphones, and video touchscreen displays in back of the driver and passenger seats. The RSI system may not operate properly until the temperature is above 20C (4F) and below 55C (131F). System Operation To use:

1. Double-tap anywhere on either screen to Power On and view the Home screen. 2. Touch } on the status bar to turn off the screen. The screens can be turned on and off through each individual touchscreen independently from the other and through front seat control. Playback of any media playing through that specific screen is paused when the screen is turned off. Screens can be locked via front seat control. If Remember Screen Power Status was selected in the settings, the screens will return to the same Power Status as when the vehicle was turned off. See Remember Screen Power Status later in this section. Home Screen

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5312644 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Watch sources include:

USB Video: Touch to go to the video player screen. Connections: Connect external devices via HDMI ports or Miracast to mirror the video playback. Recents: Shows the video content played recently. Touch the video content to play directly. Listen Sources include:

USB Music: Touch to go to the audio player screen. Recents: Shows the audio content played recently. Touch the audio content to play directly. Navigate (if equipped):Touch to access the navigation system. See Using the Navigation System. Status Bar includes:

}: Touch to turn off the screen. Double-tap anywhere on the screen to turn on the screen again. X: Touch to go to Bluetooth Headphone Setup menu. See Settings later in this section. Current Time: The current time is shown in the middle of the status bar.

*: Touch to go to the Settings menu. Rear Consumer Ports (RCP) If equipped with RSI, the RCP will be in the rear of the center console. These include 2 type C USB ports and 2 HDMI ports. USB HDMI

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442406 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Connect the media source such as Android device, iOS device, MP3 player or USB storage device, and go to the video or audio playback screen. Any USB port in the vehicle can be used to provide USB content for the RSI system.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442409 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) The HDMI input allows an HDMI A/V cable to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder, video game system, or Apple device. A cable from Apple is required for Apple devices. Touch the HDMI port that the external device was connected to on the home screen. For certain HDMI devices that support USB charging, the USB ports can be used as a power source. Content from these HDMI ports are NOT accessible through the center-stack display. To use the HDMI input of the RSI system:

1. Connect the auxiliary device with an HDMI cable. 2. Power on both the auxiliary device and the RSI video screen. 3. Touch { (Home) on the desired display and select HDMI as the source. Video Video Playback Screen Connect the media source using USB port (C Type) on the Rear Consumer Port (RCP) and play the content in the media source. Touch USB Video and the most recent viewed USB video will begin playback from the last played position. During playback, Browse may be selected to search additional available USB videos. For a newly inserted device, the Browse menu is immediately available. Recently played videos are also available from the Watch Menu. When playing a video, the playback controls are available during the first few moments. The Playback Controls can be re-displayed by touching the screen at any time.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5312649 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Playback controls include:

{ (Home): Touch { to return to the RSI Home selection screen. X (Headphones): Touch X to access the Bluetooth Headphone Setup menu. See Settings later in this section. Browse: Touch Browse to display the Video browser menu. See Video Browser later in this section. Previous/Next: Touch 7 or 6 to select the previous or next video on the current media. p or j (Play or Pause): Touch p to play or touch j to pause a video. Share: Touch to share the video playback screen with the other screen. Swiping the screen to left or right also shares the screen. Video Browser Touch Browse to go to the Select a Video screen.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442518 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) The following will display:

Recently Played: Shows the content recently played. USB1 & USB 2: Shows the content in the media source connected to USB ports on RCP. Audio Audio Playback Screen Connect the media source using USB port (C Type) on the Rear Consumer Port (RCP) and play the content in the media source. Touch USB Music. The most recent USB audio file will begin playback from the last played position. During Playback, browse may be selected to search and select additional available USB music files. For a newly inserted device, the Browse menu is immediately available from the Listen menu.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442808 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) The playback screen displays:

The connected media source. The audio content information such as title, artist, and album. The tracks album art. The playback controls. Playback controls are always displayed. Playback controls include:

The current position and total playing time. Drag the progress point to move to the position wanted.

{ (Home): Touch { to return to the RSI Home selection screen. X (Headphones): Touch X to access the Bluetooth Headphone Setup menu. See Settings later in this section. Browse: Touch Browse to display the audio browser menu. See Audio Browser later in this section. Previous/Next: Touch 7 or 6 to select the previous or next audio content. p or j (Play or Pause): Touch p to play or touch j to pause the audio content. Shuffle: Touch to play the playlist randomly. Share: Touch to share the audio playback with the other screen. Swiping the screen to left or right also shares the screen. Audio Browser Touch Browse to go to the audio browser screen.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442926 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Content in the connected media source can be sorted by Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Podcasts, and Audiobooks. Touch T to move to the The audio content currently being played. Touch this section and it moves to the audio playback screen. The content sorted by the standard you choose. Touch the content wanted. The following will display:

next page. Miracast / HDMI Miracast Connection Connect Miracast compatible devices to either the RSI screen by mirroring the display of the mobile device through WiFi-Direct. The system supports two Miracast device connections at a time (one for each screen) and allows both screens to view that single connection simultaneously through screen sharing. Apple does not support the Miracast standard. To connect initially:

back to the home screen. connection process. 1. Touch Miracast in Watch section of the home screen. The RSI system starts to initialize the Miracast connection. 2. Select %Rear Seat% from your mobile device's the Wi-Fi list. The device connection pop-up message is displayed. Touch OK. Touching Decline goes 3. Some Miracast enabled devices require to enter a PIN number, supplied by the device, into the RSI system or on the device in order to complete the 4. When the full connection is complete, the RSI screen displays a mirror image of the mobile devices display onto the associated RSI screen. Once any Miracast device has been successfully connected to the RSI system, the device connects to the RSI system automatically. The RSI system stores information of up to 10 Miracast devices. All Miracast information stored in the system can be deleted. See Miracast data delete in Settings later in this section. Miracast Playing View

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442961 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Miracast playing view shows the video content and includes:

{ (Home): Touch { to return to the RSI Home selection screen. X (Headphones): Touch X to access the Bluetooth Headphone Setup menu. See Settings later in this section.

: Touch to hide the status bar. Swipe up the bottom of the screen to display the status bar again. Share: Touch to share the screen with the other screen. Swiping the screen to left or right also shares the screen. HDMI Connection The RCP provides two HDMI ports to mirror video devices. Connect the external device to watch the device content through the RSI screen. Touch the HDMI port that was connected to the external device on the home screen. HDMI Playing View

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5442972 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) HDMI playing view shows the video content and includes:

{ (Home): Touch { to return to the RSI Home selection screen. X (Headphones): Touch X to access the Bluetooth Headphone Setup menu. See Settings later in this section. Share: Touch to share the screen with the other screen. The screen can be shared through the connected device. From the rear screen home page, touch * to access the settings menu. Settings The menu may contain the following:

Video Voice Over If equipped, the RSI system has a Video Voice Over feature to benefit the visually and hearing impaired. When activated, Video Voice Over provides audible feedback to the user about which area on the screen they are touching, identifying active buttons, as well as providing information feedback of screen identification, current status, list content, metadata, and pop-up information. It allows for the user to activate features through a double tap anywhere on the screen which relates to the last single touched and audibly announced actionable button. To turn Video Voice Over on or off, touch *, touch the toggle and then press OK to confirm. Video Voice Over will remain active over ignition cycles until it is turned off. Bluetooth Headphone Setup The RSI system will support Bluetooth headphones. Up to 9 Bluetooth headphones can be paired to each REAR SCREEN. This screen provides a list of all Bluetooth headphones that have been paired to the RSI system, as well as control over their use and settings. New Bluetooth headphones can be connected or the Bluetooth headphone settings can be changed in this screen. To pair Bluetooth headphones to one of the rear screens:

1. Select Bluetooth Headphone Setup or touch X from the desired Rear Screen Home Page. 2. Select Add New Headphones. Available Headphones. your phone before pairing to the RSI. 3. Make sure your Bluetooth headphones are in pairing mode. Once recognized by the system, your Bluetooth headphones will be displayed on the list of 4. Select your Bluetooth headphones from the list. Touch OK once the Pairing Successful pop-up displays. The headphones may need to be unpaired from 5. An option will be given to create a custom name for this pair of headphones touch Yes if you want to create a unique name for these headphones in this vehicle. Type the headphones name using virtual keyboard on the screen. The new name is assigned when touching SAVE. Paired headphones can be selected from the list of currently connected headphones. The selected headphones icon turns to green. The name of the Bluetooth headphone can be edited by touching y. To delete a connected Bluetooth headphone, Touch Y and then touch Yes. Screen Brightness Select Screen Brightness. Move the bar left or right to adjust the display brightness. Each screen may be uniquely adjusted. Remember Screen Power Status The system remembers the last power state (screen ON or OFF) of each rear screen independently. After the vehicle ignition power is turned ON, each rear screen power ON, or remain OFF, based on it's last known state prior to the previous ignition cycle. Select On or Off. Enabling Video Auto Play will cause the next available video to automatically begin playing when the previous video has ended. Disabling Video Auto Play will cause the video playback to pause until another video is selected for playback. Select On or Off. Video Auto Play Clear All Miracast Data The system stores the Miracast data of the devices which have been connected to the RSI system. The data can be deleted from this feature. Select Clear All Miracast Data. A pop-up message is displayed when the data is successfully deleted. RSI Video App Front Screen The RSI Video App will allow a front user to control the Rear Seat Video Screen sources. To access the RSI Video App, touch the RSI Video App icon from the Home Page.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5312651 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) The Rear Screens may be powered on or off from the RSI Video App. Touch the Rear Screen 1 or Rear Screen 2 icons to select a screen. Touch the 1-2 icon to view both Rear Screens together. Touching the Power icon next to the highlighted screen icon will turn that screen on or off. Both screens can be powered on or off by pressing the POWER ALL button. The audio for the rear users can be muted by the front user by pressing the mute icon associated with the left or right rear screen on the Rear Video App screen, or both rear screens by pressing the MUTE ALL button. The current source from the desired Rear Screen can also be shown on the other Rear Screen by pressing the Share button on the lower right side of the RSI Video App screens. Content can be searched for the selected source by pressing the Browse button on the right side of the RSI Video App screen. Source Selecting from the RSI Video App

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5312659 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Sources may be selected for the highlighted Rear Screen. Select Source from the RSI App screen, then select from the list of available sources shown on the RSI Sources screen. Touch More to display additional available sources. Playback Controls USB Sources

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5312660 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) Playback controls include:

6 or 7 (Next Track/Previous Track) : Touch 6 to skip ahead or 7 to skip back tracks. Touch 7 less than five seconds into the current track to start at the beginning of the previous track. Touch 7 more than five seconds into the current track to start at the beginning of the current track. 6 or 7 (Fast Forward/Fast Rewind) : Touch and hold 6 or 7 for approximately one and one-half seconds to fast forward or fast rewind. If 6 or 7 are held for approximately six seconds, the rate of fast forward or fast rewind will increase. p or j (Play or Pause): Touch p to play or touch j to pause depending on the current selection. Listen: Touch Listen to hear the audio source on the vehicle speakers. Headphones

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2746699 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Sep-2017 OWNER: Binge, Rob) 1. Power Indicator Light 2. Channel1 or 2Switch 3. Volume Control 4. Power Button 5. Battery Cover The RSI includes two or four new 2-channel digital wireless headphones, depending on the vehicle model. The headphones are used to listen to various multimedia. The wireless headphones have a power button, Channel1 or 2switch, and a volume control. The digital headphones cannot be interchanged with previous models of GM headphones. Press the power button to turn on the headphones. A light on the headphones should come on. A flashing light indicates the headphones are not in range. Move them closer to the forward overhead screen until the light stops flashing. If the light does not come on, check the batteries. Intermittent sound or static can also indicate weak batteries. See Battery Replacement later in this section. Turn the headphones off when they are not in use. Press the center of the right side of the headphone to change the channel. Channel1 will provide audio associated with screen1 and channel2 will provide audio associated with screen2. Infrared transmitters are on the top of the right seatback video screen. The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSI system is off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than threeminutes. Moving too far forward or stepping out of the vehicle can cause the headphones to lose the signal or have static. Use the volume control on the headphones to adjust the volume. For best audio performance, wear the headphones as indicated with L(Left) and R(Right) on the ear pads. Do not let anything cover the ear pads. Caution: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. If the foam ear pads become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced separately. To purchase replacement ear pads, call 1-888-293-3332 or contact your dealer. Battery Replacement To change the batteries:

2. Slide the battery door open. 3. Replace the two AAA batteries. 1. Loosen the screw to the battery door on the left side of the headphones. 4. Replace the battery door and tighten the screw. Remove the batteries if the headphones will not be used for a long time. RSI Troubleshooting No power: The ignition might not be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. There is no sound from the headphones with the indicator light on:

screen and on the correct channel for the screen being viewed. If the batteries are good, make sure the headphones are programmed to the correct Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes: Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cell phone towers or from cellular telephone use in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (Left) and R (Right) on the headphones. Check that the headphones are positioned properly with the headband across the top of the head. Newer mobile phones and tablets emit infrared light for features like face and iris detection. This infrared light can interfere with both the headphone operation. If your headphones experience static or dropouts, place your mobile device away from the rear seat displays. I lost the headphones: See your dealer for assistance. Video Distortion Video distortion can occur when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS), two-way radios, mobile faxes, or walkie talkies. It might be necessary to turn off the video player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. NNavigation

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134364 Using the Navigation System CELL ID: 182989 MODIFIED DATE: 26-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) If equipped, launch the Nav application by touching the Nav icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the bottom of the infotainment display. When the Nav application is launched for the first time, a product walkthrough is available. Use of the feature requires the Terms and Conditions and the Privacy statement to be confirmed. If available and signed into a profile, it is also suggested to enable and confirm Predictive Navigation. Predictive Navigation (If Equipped) If Predictive Navigation is available and confirmed, this feature learns preferences by remembering where the vehicle has been. It uses the locations and navigation history to personalize routes and results. Predictive Navigation may learn elements such as:

Personalized routes based on preferred streets. Search results that provide best matches at the top of the list. Predictive traffic. Local map content updating. Navigation Map View Predictive Navigation can also be enabled or disabled at a later time by touching A (Options). While in Options, touch Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Predictive Navigation. See Settings.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5354550 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2019 OWNER: Binge, Rob) After opening the Nav application for the first time, the application will always open in full map view displaying the vehicles current location. When the vehicle is stopped, the search bar will appear along the top of the navigation map view. Manually close the search bar by touching z. When the vehicle is moving, the }

(Search) icon will replace the search bar to maximize the full map view. Destination Card Preferences From the Nav application, set up Home and Work addresses to enable one-touch navigation. To set up Home and Work addresses, touch A and select Settings, then Map and Navigation Settings, and then Destination Card Preferences. Show My Places on Map should be on by default. Select and enter Home and/or Work address and save.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5448673 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Apr-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) If the vehicles system is not signed into a customized profile, the current location icon uses a generic symbol. Once signed into a customized profile, the current location symbol will show a customized icon. See Navigation Symbols. Map and Navigation Settings Touch A while in the map view to display options. The following may display:

3D Heading Up, 2D Heading Up, 2D North Show on Map Settings Traffic Events (available with OnStar Connected Navigation) Edit Destination (if a route has been set) Avoid on Route (if a route has been set) Touch Settings to view Map and Navigation Settings. The following may display:

Destination Card Preferences Map Preferences Route Preferences Navigation Voice Control Traffic Preferences Alert Preferences Fuel Grade Preferences Manage History Predictive Navigation: See Predictive Navigation (If Equipped) previously in this section. To exit a list, touch z in the top right corner to return to the main map view. Make sure to set up preferences before setting a destination and starting active guidance. Touch to choose between basic map feature configurations:

Auto Touch to automatically change modes based on lighting conditions. About Map Preferences Map Colors Day (Light) Night (Dark) 3D Landmark (Default is On): Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display all 3D Landmarks on the map depending on the zoom level. 3D Building (Default is Off): Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display all of the possible 3D building shapes on the map depending on the zoom level. Show Terrain in 3D (Default is Off):

If equipped, touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will display terrain information on the map in 3D view. Auto-Zoom (Default is On): Touch On or Off. When turned on, the system will automatically adjust the zoom level when the vehicle is approaching a turn. After the turn is completed, the system automatically brings the zoom back to the originally set level. If the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn occurring shortly after, the Auto-Zoom will remain on until both turns are completed. Route Preferences Touch to access the Route Preferences. The choices are:

Preferred Route Choose from two different route options: Fastest or Eco-Friendly. Fastest would be the route with the shortest drive time. Eco-Friendly would be the most fuel-efficient route. Avoid on Current Route Choose any of the road features to avoid while on route:

Highways Unpaved Roads Ferries Carpool Lanes Toll Roads Tunnels Country Borders Navigation Voice Control Touch to access the voice control setting display. Full Prompt (Selected by default) Tone Only None Traffic Events (If Equipped) Traffic Preferences (If Equipped) Navigation Volume To adjust the volume level, touch the up and down arrows. If the voice guidance prompt is being heard, volume can also be adjusted using the knob on the center stack or the volume switch on the steering wheel. Navigation Voice Prompt Level during a Call. Options available are:

This feature provides a list of events that are on the route or nearby. Touch A and then select Traffic Events. An OnStar connected Navigation service plan is required. While in Map View, touch A, then Settings and then Map and Navigation Settings to access Traffic Preferences. When Show Traffic on Map is turned on, the feature provides an overview of the traffic flow using different coded colors. The following options are available for rerouting:

Auto Reroute to Better Route The system will automatically reroute if the system detects there is a traffic issue ahead. Ask Before Rerouting (Default) If the system detects there is a traffic issue ahead, it will display a pop-up with details about the issue. Choose to reroute or cancel the alert. Alert Preferences Never Search for Better Route The system will not check for a better route until one of the above options is selected. Set alerts on or off during both inactive and active guidance views. The following alerts may be available:

Road Safety Alerts Touch to display upcoming School Zones. Traffic Camera Alerts Manage History Touch Manage History to access the History options:

Clear Recent Destinations Touch \ to clear the recent destinations. Clear Search History Touch \ to clear the search history. About Touch to display software information, such as:

Telenav Terms and Conditions Telenav Privacy Statement Navigation Version

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134367 CELL ID: 183001 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Feb-2019 MODIFIED BY: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Maps The Nav application requires a map database to run. It is stored on an SD card that is connected to the infotainment system. If the map database is not available, a missing SD card error message will be displayed. SD Card Error Messages The SD card only works for one unique vehicle. The SD card must pass authentication verification to be used for that specific vehicle. Potential error scenarios and messages include:

The SD card has initialized for the first time: Once initialized, this SD card can only be used for navigation in this vehicle. The SD card is not working properly: SD card is not functioning properly. (Error Code). The SD card is not paired with the existing system: This SD card is not valid in this vehicle for navigation. See Owners Manual for more detail or visit your dealer. (Error Code). The SD card has been removed from the slot: SD card has been removed. (Error Code). Touch Continue to resume after the initialization error message. For the other messages, touch OK to return to the Home Page.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134369 CELL ID: 183002 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Navigation Symbols Following are the most common symbols that may appear in the Nav application.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4474782 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Mar-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) This indicates the vehicles current location and direction on the map.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4474754 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Mar-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) This is the vehicles current location icon during inactive guidance mode. Once a user profile is created, the current location icon can be customized. This icon indicates the vehicles current location and direction on the map.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4474851 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Oct-2016 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) The destination pin marks the location of the final destination. Touch the pin to view the destination address or to add it or remove it from the Favorites list. Hide the information by touching the pin one more time. It will automatically time out if no action is taken.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5004267 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Mar-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) If equipped, smart Points of Interest (POIs) are places of interest for parking and gas stations.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4474882 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Mar-2018 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) The progress bar provides an overview of the route progress and may show traffic and incidents along the way. As the route proceeds, the vehicle icon moves up the bar. Touch the icon to zoom out on the map and view the entire route. Touch it again to return to the previous view. View the drive time by touching the estimated time of arrival (ETA). When the vehicle is parked and not in a Navigation session, the user icon is centered on the map view, highlighting the current location.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134371 CELL ID: 183004 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Current Location Destination Receiving Destination Directions from Different Sources Destinations can be received or transferred from different sources to the Nav application for route guidance. If equipped, some of these sources may include:

Navigation from search results. OnStar Advisor destination download. An address from the Contacts list. An application on the smartphone that can send destinations to the vehicle. An application downloaded to the vehicle such as OnStar Services that can send destinations to the navigation system. Waypoints Add up to five waypoints, which are additional destinations, along the route. To add an additional stop or waypoint:

1. From active guidance, touch }. 2. Search for the destination using One-Box, Voice search, or the Quick Category icons. 3. Choose search results Along Route, Nearby, or Near Destination. 4. Choose the desired waypoint and touch Add to Trip or replace the current destination by touching New Destination. Route options are not available for waypoints. Arriving at a Waypoint When approaching a waypoint, the system will display a Destination Arrival view. To continue on to the next destination touch the Drive to message on the infotainment display. If the vehicle passes the waypoint or gets out of the current route, the system will automatically reroute back to this waypoint. At the same time, it will show a Drive to icon along with the next waypoint address so the current waypoint can be skipped and guidance can resume to the next waypoint or destination. When waypoints are added during active guidance, the system allows a stop to be deleted or the order to be changed. To edit a waypoint:

Editing a Waypoint Touch A. 1. 2. Touch Edit Destinations. Modify destination order by touching and holding the arrow until it is highlighted. Drag to move the waypoint up or down the list. Delete a waypoint by touching Y. A pop-up will appear to confirm waypoint removal. Once the request is confirmed, the system will remove the address from the destinations list. Touch z on the top right corner so the system can recalculate the route. If there is only one address in the destinations list, the system will disable the move and delete functions. The system will not allow the final destination to be deleted. Map Information Road network attributes are contained in the map database for map information. Attributes include information such as street names, street addresses, and turn restrictions. A detailed area includes all major highways, service roads, and residential roads. The detailed areas include Places of Interest (POIs) such as restaurants, airports, banks, hospitals, police stations, gas stations, tourist attractions, and historical monuments. If the vehicle does not have an applicable service plan, the map database may not include data for newly constructed areas or map database corrections that are completed after production. The navigation system provides full route guidance in the detailed map areas. Zoom Control The zoom control display is shown on the map view. A few ways to zoom in or out are:

Touch + or to zoom in or out on the map. Double tap with one finger to zoom in or single tap with two fingers to zoom out on the map. Use the index finger and thumb to zoom out by pinching and then zoom in by spreading those two fingers on the map. Map Gestures and Map Scale Use the following gestures on the infotainment display to adjust the map scale and display options. Use two fingers to tilt down and change from 2D to 3D. Tilt up to change back to 2D. Pinch to zoom in or out. Pan the map. Rotate the map. See Using the System. Mute Active Guidance View Map Orientation Available settings are:

When in active guidance, the audio prompts while using navigation can be muted. Touch the speaker icon on the right side of the upper bar. A slash will appear on the speaker to indicate voice guidance is muted. When a destination is chosen and a navigation session is active, the navigation system enters into an Active Guidance View (AGV). Touch A on the map to access map orientation settings. Map orientation is 3D Heading Up by default. 3D Heading Up (Default): 3D map with the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it. 2D Heading Up: 2D map with the vehicle pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will always head up and the map will rotate around it. 2D North Up: 2D map with North pointing up. In this mode, the current location icon will shift as the vehicle turns left and right. Touch the icon to change the map type. The icon and label will also update accordingly. Depending on the zoom level of the 2D Heading Up and 3D Heading Up maps, the system may automatically switch to the 2D North Up map. When in AGV, the entire route can be viewed in 2D North Up by touching the traffic bar. The map will zoom out and readjust to display the full route. When in 2D North Up Route View, the Recenter icon will appear in the middle of the display. Touch either the Recenter icon or the traffic bar again to return to the previous view, either 2D or 3D. Lane Guidance The map will display the lane information for the upcoming maneuver if it is available. When a vehicle is on the highway and approaching the exit, an image displays the lane that the vehicle must stay in to complete the next maneuver. Junction View Quick-Turn View Auto-Zoom Directions Editing Directions Highway Exits List

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4976132 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2019 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) When the vehicle is approaching a turn with the next turn following in quick succession, a quick-turn list appears below the primary turn indicator. An audio prompt will announce the quick turn. When approaching a maneuver, the map will automatically zoom in to show both the vehicle icon and the upcoming maneuver to give a better view of the maneuver. Once the maneuver is complete, the system will zoom back to the previous zoom level. Touch A on the map to access Settings, then touch Map Preferences to access Auto-Zoom. This feature can be enabled or disabled. Touch the menu option next to the next turn street name to display Directions. Directions displays the turns and directions from the current location to the final destination. Directions can be edited by choosing y, which expands the list to fill the display and enters the Edit Mode. While in Edit Mode, an unwanted route segment can be removed from the route by touching Y next to the segment. A pop-up appears to confirm segment removal. When the route segment has been removed, all segments are replaced by an activity indicator while the new route is recalculated. When the recalculation is complete, the activity indicator is replaced with the new route segments.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4481003 MODIFIED DATE: 27-May-2020 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Touch C to open the Exit list. This icon displays next to the current street name near the bottom of the display. The icon only appears when on a highway with defined exits. While traveling on roads with designated exits, an Exit list may be available. The Exit list displays the exit number, distance to the exit from the current vehicle position, and convenience stops that may be available, such as gas, coffee, food, and lodging. When in Active Guidance, the Next Maneuver Turn Arrow, Street Name, and Maneuver Distance are shown in the Next Maneuver at the top of the display overlaying the map. ETA, Distance to Destination, and Traffic Indicator are displayed in a panel pinned on the right of the display. Next Maneuver Menu Navigation Next Turn Maneuver Alert If the Navigation application is not open when a near maneuver prompt is given, it is shown as an alert. Touch the alert to go to the main navigation view or touch z to dismiss the alert. Repeat Voice Guidance End Route Resume Trip Favorites Accessing Favorites Saving Favorites 1. 2. 3. 4. Recents

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4562707 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2019 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) This symbol indicates the next guidance maneuver. Touch it to repeat the last spoken guidance instruction. During active guidance, if the system determines that there is an incident ahead but there is not a better route, the system will play a tone and show a Quick Notice. This will only show once per incident. Incident Alert (If Equipped) Incident Reports (If Equipped) Incident report icons, along with traffic flow data, display on the map during both active and inactive guidance. Touch Cancel at the top right corner to end active guidance and return to inactive guidance. If active guidance is canceled before the destination has been reached, a pop-up option to Resume Trip will appear. The trip can be resumed if it was canceled by touching the Resume Trip pop-up option. If the system has determined that the destination has been reached, either because the arrival view displayed or the destination has been passed, the Resume Trip option will not appear. The navigation favorites can have contacts, addresses, or POIs that have been saved through the favorite icon on the details view. In the Nav application, view the Favorites list by touching H in the search bar along the top of the Nav map view. If the search bar is closed, touch } and select H. Favorites can be added from a number of the systems applications. Touch the favorites icon to save content as a favorite. Renaming Navigation Favorites Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page and touch the System tab. Touch Favorites to access the Manage Favorites option. Touch a saved Navigation favorite to access the edit icon. Touch the edit icon to rename the favorite. Touch Save to store the renamed favorite. Touch H to access a list of recent destinations. Recenter Position Icon Last Parked Location Touch the Recenter Position arrow in the middle of the map view to reset the map to the current location. The Last Parked Location is the last location the vehicle engine was turned off. That location is displayed in the first row of the Recents list. Touching the last Parked Location shows the Address Details view to either save the address or drive to it. The Last Parked Location can be deleted by entering the Edit display. Once the Last Parked Location is deleted, it no longer appears in the Recents list, unless the vehicle is started at that location again. To see the POI categories, touch Options, then touch Show on Map. Up to eight categories of icons can be selected. Show POI Icons Smart POI Icons on Map (If Equipped)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4479201 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Dec-2019 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) The smart POI icons such as fuel stations and parking may appear based on time, location, driver search behavior, driving conditions, and vehicle conditions. Touch a smart POI icon to open the corresponding details:

Left side: Name and address of the POI. Right side: E + ETE (Estimated Time Enroute.) Smart Fuel Station Icons Fuel station prices are shown if available for nearby stations when the vehicle is low on fuel. Smart Parking Icons When reaching a densely populated destination and the system determines that parking may be limited, the system will attempt to display nearby parking destinations with pricing information, if available. Report an Issue Using POI Details (If Equipped) In the POI details page, a POI issue can be reported if the data is not accurate or the address is incorrect. Touch Report an Issue near the bottom of the display to access the issue selection page. Touch one of the predefined issues on the selection page, then touch Send. The system will send the information for analysis. Search Auto Complete Touch Search on the infotainment display to open the search display. It has a search field entry box, quick category icon shortcuts, recents icon, favorites icon, and keyboard. Enter a partial location in the field entry box on the search display. Auto complete will attempt to complete the destination based on what is being entered. Touch the suggested item to search. Search While in Motion with No Front Seat Passenger Present The search display will not allow changes or text input with the keyboard when the vehicle is in motion. As a result, a display showing three rows of the most commonly used categories appears. Touching the search box will activate speech recognition. Search While in Motion with Front Seat Passenger Present If the system detects that the front seat passenger is present with both driver and passenger seat belts buckled, touching the search icon will display an alert message that allows the passenger to search for a destination as if the vehicle were stopped. Connected Navigation Connected Navigation is a subscription service that enables certain capabilities within the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive Navigation capabilities. The system will show an alert when the subscription is expiring and will ask to renew the plan.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134375 CELL ID: 183010 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Global Positioning System (GPS) If equipped, the position of the vehicle is determined by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, and map data. At times, other interference such as the satellite condition, road configuration, condition of the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can affect the navigation system's ability to determine the accurate position of the vehicle. The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using signals sent by GPS satellites. When the vehicle is not receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appears in the status bar. This system might not be available or interference can occur if any of the following are true:

Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large trucks, or a tunnel. Satellites are being repaired or improved. For more information if the GPS is not functioning properly, see Problems with Route Guidance and If the System Needs Service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134378 CELL ID: 183011 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Feb-2019 MODIFIED BY: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) At times, the position of the vehicle on the map could be inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:

Vehicle Positioning The road system has changed. The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such as sand, gravel, or snow. The vehicle is traveling on winding roads or long, straight roads. The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large vehicle. The surface streets run parallel to a freeway. The vehicle has been transferred by a vehicle carrier or a ferry. The current position calibration is set incorrectly. The vehicle is traveling at high speed. The vehicle changes directions more than once, or the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot. The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot, garage, or a lot with a roof. The GPS signal is not received. A roof carrier is installed on the vehicle. Tire chains are installed on the vehicle. The tires are replaced or worn. The tire pressure for the tires is incorrect. This is the first navigation use after the map data is updated. The 12-volt battery has been disconnected for several days. The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started repeatedly.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134381 CELL ID: 183012 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Feb-2019 MODIFIED BY: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Problems with Route Guidance Inappropriate route guidance can occur under one or more of the following conditions:

The turn was not made on the road indicated. Route guidance might not be available when using automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn. The route might not be changed when using automatic rerouting. There is no route guidance when turning at an intersection. Plural names of places might be announced occasionally. It could take a long time to operate automatic rerouting during high-speed driving. Automatic rerouting might display a route returning to the set waypoint if heading for a destination without passing through a set waypoint. The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a regulation by time or season or any other regulation which may be given. Some routes might not be searched. The route to the destination might not be shown if there are new roads, if roads have recently changed, or if certain roads are not listed in the map data. See Maps. To recalibrate the vehicle's position on the map, park with the vehicle running for two to five minutes, until the vehicle position updates. Make sure the vehicle is parked in a location that is safe and has a clear view of the sky and away from large obstructions.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134384 CELL ID: 183013 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jun-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) If the System Needs Service If the navigation system needs service, see your dealer. Map Data Updates

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134387 CELL ID: 206659 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jun-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) The map data in the vehicle is the most up-to-date information available when the vehicle was produced. The map data is updated periodically, provided that the map information has changed and the vehicle has a relevant service plan. See www.gmnavdisc.com for details on ordering, purchasing, and installing a new or replacement SD card. Features are subject to change. For more information on this feature, see my.chevrolet.com/learn. If the vehicle is equipped with Connected Navigation, which is a subscription service that enables certain features of the navigation system, such as Traffic, Smart Search/Routing, and Predictive Navigation, then the system will download the latest map data from the cloud.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5134390 CELL ID: 183015 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Feb-2019 MODIFIED BY: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Database Coverage Explanations Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map detail available for any given area. Some areas feature greater levels of detail than others. If this happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the system. As the map data is updated, more detail can become available for areas that previously had limited detail. See Map Data Updates. CELL ID: 183017 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) If equipped, voice recognition Google Assistant allows for hands-free operation within the audio, phone and navigation. This feature can be started by pressing g on the steering wheel or by using the wake up words Hey Google or Ok Google. However, not all features within these areas are supported by voice commands. Generally, only complex tasks that require multiple manual interactions to complete are supported by voice commands. If equipped, this feature helps distinguish words by using Internet-based information along with the systems voice recognition database. This allows you to speak more naturally when using voice recognition. VVoice Recognition

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5636722 Voice Recognition Hybrid Speech Recognition Using Voice Recognition Voice recognition becomes available once the system has been initialized. This begins when the ignition is turned on. Initialization may take a few moments. 1. Press g on the steering wheel controls or by using the wake up words Hey Google or Ok Google to activate voice recognition. 2. The audio system mutes and the system plays a prompt. 3. Clearly speak one of the commands described in this section. A voice recognition system prompt can be interrupted while it is playing by pressing g again. Canceling Voice Recognition Touch or say Cancel or Exit to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated. Press i on the steering wheel controls to terminate the voice recognition session and show the display where voice recognition was initiated. Natural Language Commands Most languages do not support natural language commands in sentence form. For those languages, use direct commands like the examples shown on the display. Voice recognition can understand commands that are naturally stated in sentence form or direct commands that state the application and the task. Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands For best results:

Speak the command naturally, not too fast, not too slow. Use direct commands without a lot of extra words. For example, Call <name> at work, Play followed by the artist or song name, or Tune followed by the radio station number. Direct commands might be more clearly understood by the system. An example of a direct command would be Call <number>. Examples of these direct commands are displayed on most of the screens while a voice session is active. If Phone or Phone Commands, is spoken, the system understands that a phone call is requested and will respond with questions until enough details are gathered to make a call. If a cell phone number has been saved with a name and a place, the direct command should include both, for example Call <name> at work. Voice Recognition for the Radio If browsing the audio sources when voice is touched, the voice recognition commands for AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if equipped) are available. Switch to AM: Switch bands to AM and tune to the last AM radio station. Switch to FM: Switch bands to FM and tune to the last FM radio station. Switch to SXM: Switch bands to SiriusXM and tune to the last SiriusXM channel. Tune to <AM frequency> AM: Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like nine fifty). Tune to <FM frequency> FM: Tune to the radio station whose frequency is identified in the command (like one oh one point one). Tune to SXM <SXM channel number>: Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel number is identified in the command. Tune to SXM <SXM channel name>: Tune to the SiriusXM radio station whose channel name is identified in the command. Voice Recognition for the Phone Make sure the phone is paired using Bluetooth to use the phone related voice commands. Call <contact name>:

Initiate a call to a stored contact. The command may include location if the contact has location numbers stored. Call <contact> At Home, At Work, On Mobile, or On Other:

on another phone. Initiate a call to a stored contact and location at home, at work, on mobile device, or Call <cell phone number>:

Initiate a call to a cell phone number of seven digits, 10 digits, or three digit emergency numbers. Pair Phone: Begin the Bluetooth pairing process. Follow the instructions on the infotainment display. Redial:

Initiate a call to the last dialed number. Switch Phone: Select a different connected cell phone for outgoing calls. Voice Keypad: Begin a dialog to enter special numbers like international numbers. The numbers can be entered in groups of digits with each group of digits being repeated back by the system. If the group of digits is not correct, the command Delete will remove the last group of digits and allow them to be re-

entered. Once the entire number has been entered, the command Call will start dialing the number. Phone Assistant Voice Recognition Press and hold g on the steering wheel controls to pass through and launch Phone Google assistant or Siri. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) CELL ID: 183021 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) A Bluetooth-enabled mobile device must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the mobile device manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the device. PPhone

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5636727 Pairing Pairing Information Touch the Phone icon on the home page of the infotainment display. If no mobile device has been paired, a message on the infotainment display will show the Connect Phone option. Touch this option to pair the phone. See Pairing a Phone later in this section. A Bluetooth smartphone with music capability can be paired to the vehicle as a smartphone and a music player at the same time. Up to 10 devices can be paired to the Bluetooth system. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set to First to Connect. If there is no cell phone set to First to Connect, it will link to the cell phone which was used last. To link to a different paired cell phone, see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section. Pairing a Phone 1. Make sure Bluetooth has been enabled on the cell phone before the pairing process is started. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page. If no mobile device is connected, touch Connect Phones and the Phones screen will display. If another mobile device is connected already, touch Settings, Connections, and then Phones. Touch Add Phone. Follow the on-screen prompts to pair the phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to confirm the six-digit code showing on the infotainment display and touch Pair. The code on the cell phone and infotainment display will need to be acknowledged for a successful pair. 7. Start the pairing process on the cell phone to be paired to the vehicle. See the cell phone manufacturer's user guide for information on this process. Once the cell phone is paired, it will show under Connected. 8. If the vehicle name does not appear on your cell phone, there are a few ways to start the pairing process over:

Make sure there isn't an entry for the vehicle under the previously connected list. If the vehicle and phone were previously paired and one still remembers the other, it will not identify as a new device when searching. Turning the Bluetooth off and on the device. Go back to the beginning of the Phone menus on the infotainment display and restart the pairing process. Reset the cell phone, but this step should be done as a last effort. Turn the cell phone off and then back on. 9. If the cell phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, touch Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted. 10. To pair additional cell phones, touch Settings, Connections, and then Phones. First to Connect Paired Phones If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired cell phone that is set as First to Connect. To enable a paired cell phone as the First to Connect phone:

1. Make sure the cell phone is turned on. 2. Touch the Settings icon on the home page. Touch First to Connect from the cell phones settings menu. The settings will be enabled for that device. Cell phones and mobile devices can be added, removed, connected, and disconnected. A sub-menu will display whenever a request is made to add or manage cell phones and mobile devices. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page or the Settings icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the Phone icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Connections. Touch Phone. Touch Options under the connected phone. Listing All Paired and Connected Phones There are two ways to access the device list screen:

Using the Settings Icon Touch Connections. Touch Phones. Using the Phone Icon Touch * on the top right of the Phones screen. Touch Connected Phone. Disconnecting a Connected Phone There are two ways to disconnect a phone:

Using the Settings Icon Touch Connections. Touch Phones. Touch Disconnect. Using the Phone Icon 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page or the Settings icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Option on the phone card to show the cell phones or mobile devices settings. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the Phone icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch * on the top right of the Phones screen. Touch Connected Phone. Touch Option on the phone card to show the cell phones or mobile devices settings. Touch Disconnect. Deleting a Paired Phone There are two ways to delete a paired phone:

Using the Settings Icon Touch Connections. Touch Phones. Touch Forget Phone. Using the Phone Icon Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page or the Settings icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Option on the phone card to show the cell phones or mobile devices settings. 1. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the Phone icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch * on the top right of the Phones screen. Touch Connected Phone. Touch Option on the phone card to show the cell phones or mobile devices settings. To link to a different cell phone, the new cell phone must be in the vehicle and paired to the Bluetooth system. Touch the Settings icon on the Home Page or the Settings icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Forget Phone. Linking to a Different Phone There are two ways to link to a different phone:

Using the Settings Icon Touch Connections. Touch Phones. Using the Phone Icon Touch * on the top right of the Phones screen. Touch Connected Phone. Switching to Handset or Handsfree Mode To switch between handset or handsfree mode:

Touch the new cell phone to link to from the list of available phones. See First to Connect Paired Phones previously in this section. Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or the Phone icon on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch the new cell phone to link to from the not connected phone list. See First to Connect Paired Phones previously in this section. Calls can be made through the Bluetooth system using personal cell phone contact information for all cell phones that support the Phone Book feature. Become familiar with the cell phone settings and operation. Verify the cell phone supports this feature. While the active call is hands-free, touch the Handset option to switch to the handset mode. The mute icon will not be available or functional while Handset mode is active. While the active call is on the handset, touch the Handset option to switch to the hands-free mode. Making a Call Using Contacts The Contacts menu accesses the phone book stored in the cell phone. To make a call using the Contacts menu:

Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Contacts. There are two methods to search for contacts:

First method: The Contacts list can be searched by using the search bar. Touch the search icon on the top right of the Phones window and type the name or number of the contact on the keyboard. Search results will be displayed corresponding to the user input. Touch the name to call. Second method: Scroll thru the list using your finger on the list, or via the scrollbar on the left side of the Phones window. Touch the name to call. Making a Call Using the Recents Menu The Recents menu accesses the recents call list from your cell phone. To make a call using the Recents menu:

Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Recents. Touch the name or number to call. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Making a Call Using the Keypad To make a call by dialing the numbers:

Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page or on the shortcut tray near the left of the display. Touch Keypad and enter a phone number. Touch # on the infotainment display to start dialing the number. Searching Contacts Using the Keypad To search for contacts using the keypad:

Touch the Phone icon on the Home Page. Touch Keypad and enter partial phone numbers or contact names using the digits on the keypad to search. Results will show on the right side of the display. Touch one to place a call. When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Accepting or Declining a Call Accepting a Call There are two ways to accept a call:

Press g on the steering wheel controls. Touch Answer on the infotainment display. Declining a Call There are two ways to decline a call:

Press c on the steering wheel controls. Touch Ignore on the infotainment display. Call Waiting Accepting a Call Declining a Call Press g to answer, then touch Switch on the infotainment display. Press c to decline, then touch Ignore on the infotainment display Switching Between Calls (Call Waiting Calls Only) Ending a Call Press c on the steering wheel controls. Touch # on the infotainment display, next to a call, to end only that call. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones Bluetooth (Overview) The Bluetooth-capable system can interact with many mobile devices, allowing:

Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. To switch between calls, touch Phone on the Home Page to display Call View. While in Call View, touch the call information of the call on hold to change calls. The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system. Use the Keypad to enter the number.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5731627 CELL ID: 183021 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Feb-2021 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode. Sharing of the devices address book or contact list with the vehicle. Streaming audio (music, podcasts). Notifying of text messages when received.. To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:

Become familiar with the features of the mobile device. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries. Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system. Pair mobile device(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all mobile devices. See Pairing later in this section. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable mobile device with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1m (30ft). Not all mobile devices support all functions and not all mobile devices work with the Bluetooth system. See your dealer for more information about compatible mobile devices. Use the controls on the infotainment display and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system. gg: Press and release to answer incoming calls on your connected Bluetooth mobile device. Press and hold for mobile device assistant. c: Press to end a call, decline a call, or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call. For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Using the System. Controls Steering Wheel Controls Infotainment System Controls Audio System When using the Bluetooth mobile device system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. The volume level while on a mobile device call can be adjusted by pressing the steering wheel controls or the volume control on the center stack. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. The volume cannot be lowered beyond a certain level.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5361075 CELL ID: 274020 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) If equipped, Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay capability may be available through a compatible smartphone. If available, the Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons will change from gray to color on the Home Page of the infotainment display. Apple CarPlay and Android Auto To use Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay:

For Wired Phone Projection 1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay. 2. Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the devices factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work. 3. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, accept the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon USB connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch. phone. 4. Follow the instructions on the phone. Press { on the center stack to return to the Home Page. For Wireless Phone Projection (If Equipped) Verify your phone is wireless compatible by visiting the Google Android Auto or Apple CarPlay support page. 1. Download the Android Auto app to your smartphone from the Google Play store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay. 2. For first time connection, there are two ways to set up wireless projection:

Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the devices factory-provided USB cable, which should be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work. Connecting the phone over Bluetooth. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)Bluetooth (Overview). 3. Make sure wireless is turned on the phone for wireless projection to work. 4. When the phone is first connected to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, agree to the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone. 5. Follow the instructions on the phone. The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the Home Page will illuminate depending on the smartphone. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon wireless connection. If not, touch the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the Home Page to launch. Wireless Carplay and/or Wireless Android Auto may experience occasional service disruption due to outside Wi-Fi interference. To disconnect the phones wireless projection:

1. Select Settings from the Home Page. 2. Select Phones 3. 4. Touch 4 next to the phone to be disconnected. Turn off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. Press { on the center stack to return to the Home Page. Features are subject to change. For further information on how to set up Android Auto and Apple CarPlay in the vehicle, see your dealer. Android Auto is provided by Google and is subject to Googles terms and privacy policy. Apple CarPlay is provided by Apple and is subject to Apples terms and privacy policy. Data plan rates apply. For Android Auto support and to see if your phone is compatible, see https://support.google.com/androidauto. For Apple CarPlay support and to see if your phone is compatible, see www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Apple or Google may change or suspend availability at any time. Android Auto, Android, Google, Google Play, and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.; Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. Press { on the center stack to exit Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. To enter back into Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, press and hold { on the center stack. Apple CarPlay and Android Auto can be disabled from the infotainment system. To do this, touch Home, Settings, and then touch the Apps tab along the top of the display. Use the On/Off toggled to turn off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. SSettings

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5636738 Settings CELL ID: 221294 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob) Certain settings can be managed in the Owner Center sites when an account is established, and may be modified if other users have accessed the vehicle or created accounts. This may result in changes to the security or functionality of the infotainment system. Some settings may also be transferred to a new vehicle, if equipped. For instructions, in the U.S. see my.gmc.com or in Canada see mygmc.ca or mongmc.ca. Refer to the User Terms and Privacy Statement for important details. To view, touch the Settings icon on the Home Page of the infotainment display. To access the personalization menus:

Touch Settings on the Home Page on the infotainment display. Touch the desired category to display a list of available options. Touch to select the desired feature setting. Touch the options on the infotainment display to disable or enable a feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. TouchS to go back. The Settings menu may contain the following:

Connections Phones Wi-Fi Networks Touch Add Phone to pair a Bluetooth device. This will show connected and available Wi-Fi networks. Touch Add Other Network to add another available network. Wi-Fi Hotspot Touch and the following may display:

Wi-Fi Services: This allows devices to use the vehicle hotspot. Touch the controls on the infotainment display to disable or enable. Wi-Fi Name: Touch to change the vehicle Wi-Fi name. Wi-Fi Password: Touch to change the vehicle Wi-Fi password. not its data. Connected Devices: Touch to show connected devices. Vehicle-to-Phone Sharing This menu allows adjustment of different vehicle features. See Vehicle Personalization. Vehicle Apps & Notifications Show all apps Touch to view the App info screen. Default apps Touch to view the Default apps screen. Touch each app listed to get more information about that app. Share Hotspot Data: Touch On to allow devices to use the vehicle hotspot and its data, or touch Off to allow devices to only use the vehicle hotspot but When this feature is on, this will allow Android Auto or Apple CarPlay apps to use vehicle data on the listed shown phones. App permisions Touch to view the Permission manager screen. This shows apps using location and phone. Special apps access Touch to view the Special app access screen and the following may display:

Modify system settings: Touch to show apps that can be enabled or disabled to modify the system settings. Notification access: Touch to show the notification access screen. Premium SMS access: This may cost money to the carrier bill. If permission for an app is enabled, premium SMS can be sent using that app. Usage access: Touch to allow an app to track what other apps are being used, how often, carrier and language settings, and other details Wi-Fi control: Touch to allow an app to turn Wi-Fi on or off, scan and connect to Wi-Fi networks, add or remove networks, or start a local only hotspot. Time/Date Use the following features to set the clock:

Use 24-hour Format: Touch to specify the clock format shown. Touch Off or On. Automatic Time Zone (If Equipped): Touch Off or On to disable or enable automatic update of the time zone based on vehicle location. When this feature is on, the time zone cannot be manually set. Select Time Zone: Touch to manually set the time zone. Touch a time zone from the list. Automatic Time and Date: Touch Off or On to enable or disable automatic update of the time and date. Select Off to manually set time and date To manually set time or date, scroll up or down on the month, day, year, hour, minute and AM/PM. Mode: This adjusts the appearance of the navigation map view and any downloaded apps optimized for day or night time conditions. Set to Auto for the display to automatically adjust based on bright/dark conditions. Touch Auto, Light, or Dark to adjust the display. Turn Display Off: Touch to turn the display off. Touch anywhere on the infotainment display to turn the display on. Maximum Startup Volume: This feature limits the volume of the infotainment system when the vehicle is started. To set the maximum startup volume, touch the controls on the infotainment display to increase or decrease. Audible Touch Feedback: This setting determines if a sound plays when touching the infotainment display or radio controls. This feature can be turned off Display Touch and the following may display:

Sounds Touch and the following may display:

Touch and the following may display:

or on. Users You (Driver) Guest Accounts Touch Add user to add another person to they system. Touch to show Accounts for Driver and the following may display:

Touch Add account to add a Google or vehicle account and follow the on-screen prompts. Location Services for Android: Touch to show Recent Location Requests, App level permissions, and Location Services. Location Services for OnStar: This feature can be turned off or on. Touch to show the storage info for Music & audio, Other apps, Files, and System. Accounts Automatically sync data Privacy Location Services Touch and the following may display:

Private DNS Storage Security Choose a lock type Touch and the following may display:

None: Touch to have no screen lock. Pattern: Touch to choose an unlock pattern to draw. PIN: Touch to create a PIN. Password: Touch to create a password Trusted devices Touch to show or add a trusted device. The menu may contain the following:

System Language Keyboard & speech Touch and the following may display:

This will set the display language used on the infotainment display. It may also use the selected language for voice recognition and audio feedback. Touch the preferred language. Autofill service: Touch to select None or Google. Keyboard: Touch to select Google Automotive Keyboard or Manage keyboards. Text-to-speech output: Touch to select Preferred engine, Speech Rate, Pitch, or Reset. Return to Factory Settings Touch and the following may display:

Reset Vehicle Settings: Resets all vehicle settings for all users. Touch Reset or Cancel. Erase All Data: Erases all data from the infotainment system including user profiles, system and app settings, and downloaded apps. Touch Erase or Cancel. Reset App Preferences: Resets all preferences for disabled apps, disabled app notifications, default applications for actons, background data restrictions When on, OnStar calls are made as a series of text exchanges. A keyboard is shown for text entry and the phone audio is muted. for apps, and any permission restrictions. App data will not be lost. Touch Reset or Cancel. TTY Mode About Touch to view the infotainment system software information. Legal Information Touch to view legal and license information. Local System Update Touch and the following may display:

Check for Updates: Touch to see if the software is up to date. Previous Updates: Touch to show previous update information. Touch Off or On. Google Touch and the following may display:

Services Autofill with Google Google Assistant Send feedback to Google Preferences: Touch to download new updates in the background or download updates via Wi-Fi when possible. TTrademarks and License Agreements

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5413234 CELL ID: 201513 Trademarks and License Agreements FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement. MODIFIED DATE: 25-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Binge, Rob)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2533895 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Feb-2011 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane)

"Made for iPod," and "Made for iPhone," mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2772523 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2012 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) TouchSense Technology and TouchSense System 1000 Series Licensed from Immersion Corporation. TouchSense System 1000 protected under one or more of the U.S. Patents at the following address www.immersion.com/patent-marking.html and other patents pending. Bose AudioPilot and Bose Centerpoint surround are registered trademarks of Bose Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Bose HD Radio Technology

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4566409 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jul-2016 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. Bluetooth Java Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Schedule I: Gracenote EULA

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2150532 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Nov-2009 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information see www.gracenote.com. Music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote may apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries. Gracenote Terms of Use This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this application to do disc or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information

("Gracenote Data") from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, "Gracenote Servers") and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. This application or device may contain content belonging to Gracenotes providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you "AS IS." Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. 2014. Gracenote, Inc. All Rights Reserved. MPEG4AVC (H.264) THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. VC-1 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (VC-1 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES. FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM. MPEG4Visual MP3 WMV/WMA MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and under a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft Corporation and/or Microsoft Licensing, GP as applicable. Map End User License Agreement END USER TERMS The Map Data SD card (Data) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms

(this End User License Agreement) and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and HERE North America, LLC (HERE) and its licensors

(including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, Queen's Printer for Ontario, Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase. HERE holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service to publish and sell ZIP+4 information. United States Postal Service 2013. Prices are not established, controlled, or approved by the United States Postal Service. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4. TERMS AND CONDITIONS Personal Use Only: You agree to use this Data for the solely personal, noncommercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. You may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement. Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used, and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. Restrictions Warning No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is, and you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations, or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free. THE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS AND HARMAN (AND THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY HARMAN (OR ANY OF THEIR LICENSORS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS) SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Disclaimer of Warranty Disclaimer of Liability HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories, and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims, and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. Export Control Governing Law Government End Users If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a commercial item as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (FAR) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3730386 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Feb-2014 OWNER: Kahlich-Vitale, Diane) NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME:

HERE North America, LLC CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606. 2014 HERE North America, LLC. All rights reserved. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. Copyright 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Unicode Free Type Project Open Source SW Portions of this software are copyright 2010 The FreeType Project (http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Further information concerning the OSS licenses is shown in the infotainment display. Portions of this software are copyright 2008-2011, QNX Software Systems. All rights reserved. QNX Part C EULA Copyright 2011, Software Systems GmbH & Co. KG. All Rights Reserved. The product you have purchased ("Product") contains Software (Runtime Configuration No. 505962; "Software") which is distributed by or on behalf of the Product manufacturer "Manufacturer") under license from Software Systems Co. ("QSSC"). You may only use the Software in the Product and in compliance with the license terms below. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, QSSC hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software in the Product for the purpose intended by the Manufacturer. If permitted by the Manufacturer, or by applicable law, you may make one backup copy of the Software as part of the Product software. QSSC and its licensors reserve all license+C31 rights not expressly granted herein, and retain all right, title and interest in and to all copies of the Software, including all intellectual property rights therein. Unless required by applicable law you may not reproduce, distribute or transfer, or de-compile, disassemble or otherwise attempt to unbundle, reverse engineer, modify or create derivative works of, the Software. You agree: (1) not to remove, cover or alter any proprietary notices, labels or marks in or on the Software, and to ensure that all copies bear any notice contained on the original; and (2) not to export the Product or the Software in contravention of applicable export control laws. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITS LICENSORS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS"

BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANY WARRANTIES OR OTHER PROVISIONS OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFER FROM THIS LICENSE ARE OFFERED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITS DISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND NOT BY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS. YOU ASSUME ANY RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS LICENSE. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN THE CASE OF DELIBERATE OR GROSSLY NEGLIGENT ACTS), IN NO EVENT SHALL QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER ARISING AS A RESULT OF THIS LICENSE OR OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, PRODUCT FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. WMA Linotype This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft. For more information on the Software, including any open source software license terms (and available source code) as well as copyright attributions applicable to the Runtime Configuration indicated above, please contact the Manufacturer or contact QSSC at 175 Terence Matthews Crescent, Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2M 1W8 (licensing@qnx.com). Helvetica is a trademark of Linotype Corp. registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions in the name of Linotype Corp. or its licensee Linotype GmbH. Usage in text form of each of the Licensed Trademarks is:

The trademark attribution requirements for the Licensed Trademarks may be viewed at http://www.linotype.com/2061-19414/trademarks.html. END USER NOTICE The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners. The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product. Climate Controls CClimate Control Systems

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5678740 CELL ID: 183699 Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system. MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5394515 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 2. MAX Defrost 3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 4. A/C (Air Conditioning) 5. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature) 6. Recirculation 7. Power Button 8. Fan Control 9. Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) or Heated Mirrors (If Equipped) 10. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Climate Control Display

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4937980 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Feb-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Settings 2. Fan Control 3. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 4. Sync (Synchronized Temperature) 5. Recirculation 6. Air Delivery Mode Controls 7. Auto (Automatic Operation) 8. A/C (Air Conditioning) 9. On/Off (Power) The fan, air delivery mode, air conditioning, driver and passenger temperatures, and Sync settings can be controlled by touching CLIMATE on the infotainment Home Page or the climate button in the climate control display application tray. A selection can then be made on the front climate control page displayed. See the infotainment manual. Climate Control Status Display Automatic Operation For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO. Manual Operation

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4937983 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Sep-2018 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The climate control status display appears briefly when the center stack climate controls are adjusted. The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature. When AUTO is lit, all four functions operate automatically. Each function can also be manually set and the selected setting is displayed. Functions not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, even if the AUTO indicator is not lit. 2. Set the temperature. Allow the system time to stabilize. Adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort. To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather. The recirculation light will not come on when automatically controlled. See @ under Manual Operation for more details. 99: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press the knob to turn the fan off. When off is selected, a small amount of air may still come out of the outlets depending on vehicle speed. If any buttons are pressed or knobs are turned, the climate control system will turn on and operate at the current setting. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. Driver and Passenger Temperature Control: The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and passenger. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the driver or passenger temperature setting. The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting increasing or decreasing. SYNC: Press to link the passenger temperature setting to the driver setting. The SYNC indicator light will turn on. When the passenger setting is adjusted, the SYNC indicator light will turn off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Press z, Y, or [ to change the direction of the airflow. Any combination of the three controls can be selected. An indicator light comes on in the selected mode button. Changing the mode cancels the automatic operation and the system goes into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. To change the current mode, select one or more of the following:

zz: Air is directed to the windshield, outboard a/c outlets, and side window outlets. Y: Air is directed to the a/c outlets.

[: Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some air directed to the windshield, outboard a/c outlets, and side window outlets. 0 MAX: Air is directed to the windshield and the fan runs at a higher speed if not already above a medium fan speed. This mode overrides the previous mode selected and clears fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. When the control is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting and fan speed. For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

@: Press to turn on recirculation. An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle. Avoid using recirculation for long periods of time in cold or damp conditions. Using recirculation in cold or damp conditions can result in window fogging. A/C: Press to turn the air conditioning on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run. The A/C light will stay on even if the outside temperatures are below freezing. Rear Window Defogger 1 REAR:

on. If equipped, press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is The rear window defogger only works when the engine is running. The defogger turns off if the ignition is turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY. If equipped with heated outside mirrors, press f to turn them on or off. See Heated Mirrors. Caution: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects. Remote Start Climate Control Operation:

with heated or ventilated seats or a heated steering wheel, these features may come on during a remote start. See Remote Vehicle Start, Heated Front Seats, and Heated Steering Wheel. If equipped with remote start, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. If equipped Sensors

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5503518 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Apr-2020 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The solar sensor, on top of the instrument panel near the windshield, monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort. Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the automatic climate control system may not work properly. If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5367873 CELL ID: 183033 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Afterblow Feature Rear Climate Control System The rear climate control system is located on the rear of the center console storage. The rear climate settings can be adjusted with this system.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5367871 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Fan Control 1. 2. TEMP (Temperature Control) 3. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped) 4. MODE (Air Delivery Mode Control) 5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) If the dual automatic climate control system rear climate control lockout feature is locked, the rear climate control settings can only be adjusted from the front seat. Rear Climate Display

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5163844 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Nov-2018 OWNER: Linn, Kera) 1. Rear Climate Temperature Control 2. Fan Control 3. Outside Temperature Display 4. Sync (Synchronized Temperatures) 5. Rear Control Lockout 6. Air Delivery Mode Control 7. Auto (Automatic Operation) 8. On/Off (Power) Automatic Operation AUTO: Press AUTO to automatically control the temperature, air delivery, and fan speed for rear seat passengers. A is indicated in the display when automatic operation is active. If any of the rear climate control settings are manually adjusted, full automatic operation is canceled. Press AUTO to return to full automatic operation. The display only indicates climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode. Manual Operation 99: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn completely counterclockwise to turn the fan/power off. TEMP: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature into the passenger area. If the SYNC button is pressed on the front climate controls, the rear climate temperature is linked to the driver temperature setting. MODE: Press to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections. M or L:

If equipped, press M or L to heat the left or right outboard seat cushion. See Heated Rear Seats. AAir Vents

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5573043 Air Vents Adjustable air vents are in the center and on the side of the instrument panel. CELL ID: 183034 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Jun-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5390857 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Move the slider knobs to change the direction of the airflow. To close the vent, adjust slider knob away from you. Rear System Air Vents This vehicle has four round or rectangular air vents in the headliner above the second and third row seats.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5390880 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Press on the center vane rear edge to open the round outlet. Use the center vane to rotate the outlet and change the direction of the airflow. Press on the center vane leading edge to shut off the air flow.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5390883 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Move the slider knob on rectangular vents and rotate the outlet barrel left to right to change the direction of the air flow and to shut off the air flow. Operation Tips Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle. Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle. When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press the fan up button to the maximum fan level before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the window. Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. MMaintenance

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5382962 Passenger Compartment Air Filter CELL ID: 183039 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) The filter reduces the dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule. To find out what type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5384985 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 1. Open the lower glove box door completely.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5386216 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 2. Press the sides of the glove box bin inward to clear the stoppers and rotate downward to lower the bin.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5403757 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Sep-2019 OWNER: Richardson, Lamea) 3. Unsnap dampener by pushing outwards to fully remove the glove box bin.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5403418 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 4. Pull the lever (1) on the left side of the filter door and slide left (2), then remove the door. Remove the old filter. 5. Install the new air filter. 6. Reinstall the filter door. 7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the glove box. See your dealer if additional assistance is needed. Service

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5001580 CELL ID: 183041 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation. During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns. The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule. Driving and Operating DDriving Information

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4910756 Driving for Better Fuel Economy CELL ID: 185290 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible:

Set the climate controls to the desired temperature after the engine is started, or turn them off when not required. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. Combine several trips into a single trip. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance. Distracted Driving Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4494877 CELL ID: 213594 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area. To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone. Warning: Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving. Refer to the infotainment section for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4640748 CELL ID: 183045 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected. The first step in driving defensively is to wear the seat belt. See Seat Belts. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they may do and be ready. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2527995 CELL ID: 183048 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2528000 CELL ID: 183049 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Focus on the task of driving. Control of a Vehicle Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time. Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100km/h (60mph) travels 20m (66ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency. Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:

Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. Avoid needless heavy braking. Keep pace with traffic. If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5199055 CELL ID: 183050 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Steering Caution: To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3km/h (1mph). Use care when driving over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5192442 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Dec-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) Electric Power Steering This vehicle has electric power steering. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required. If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort. If the steering assist is used for an extended period of time while the vehicle is not moving, power assist may be reduced. If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel, and is held in that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced. Normal use of the power steering assist should return when the system cools down. See your dealer if there is a problem. Curve Tips Take curves at a reasonable speed. Reduce speed before entering a curve. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway. Steering in Emergencies There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2528011 CELL ID: 183051 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Off-Road Recovery

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1966764 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Tanner, Norm) The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. 2. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2528022 CELL ID: 183052 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Loss of Control Skidding There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:

Braking Skid wheels are not rolling. Steering or Cornering Skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. Acceleration Skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:

Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5389226 CELL ID: 183054 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Off-Road Driving Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be used for off-road driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles not equipped with All Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road

(OOR) tires must not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface. For contact information about the original equipment tires, see the warranty manual. One of the best ways for successful off-road driving is to control the speed. Warning: When driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Before Driving Off-Road Have all necessary maintenance and service work completed. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, and check inflation pressure in all tires, including the spare, if equipped. Read all the information about four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual. Know the local laws that apply to off-road driving. Loading the Vehicle for Off-Road Driving Warning:

Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle. Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been set aside for public off-road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations. For more information about loading the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits and Tires. Environmental Concerns Do not damage shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife. Do not park over things that burn. See Parking over Things That Burn. Driving on Hills Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do. Warning: Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. Driving up hills can cause the vehicle to stall. Driving down hills can cause loss of control. Driving across hills can cause a rollover. You could be injured or killed. Do not drive on steep hills. Before driving on a hill, assess the steepness, traction, and obstructions. If the terrain ahead cannot be seen, get out of the vehicle and walk the hill before driving further. When driving on hills:

Use a low gear and keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Maintain a slow speed. When possible, drive straight up or down the hill. Slow down when approaching the top of the hill. Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible. Warning: Driving to the top of a hill at high speed can cause a crash. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. Never go downhill forward or backward with either the transmission or transfer case in N (Neutral). The brakes could overheat and you could lose control. Warning: If the vehicle has the two-speed automatic or electronic transfer case, shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). This is because the N (Neutral) position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If leaving the vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P (Park). Shift the transfer case to any position but N (Neutral). When driving down a hill, keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear because the engine will work with the brakes to slow the vehicle and help keep the vehicle under control. Warning: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and you or others could be injured or killed. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop the vehicle, and then apply the parking brake. 2. Shift into P (Park) and then restart the engine. If driving uphill when the vehicle stalls, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and back straight down. Never try to turn the vehicle around. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. Never back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake. The vehicle can roll backward quickly and you could lose control. If driving downhill when the vehicle stalls, shift to a lower gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down the hill. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill. 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted after stalling, set the parking brake, shift into P (Park), and turn the vehicle off. 3.1. Leave the vehicle and seek help. 3.2. Stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Avoid turns that take the vehicle across the incline of the hill. A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels, which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it a rock, a rut, etc. and roll over. Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline more severe. If a rock is driven across with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more. If an incline must be driven across, and the vehicle starts to slide, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. Warning: Getting out of the vehicle on the downhill side when stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice Use a low gear when driving in mud the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoid getting stuck. Traction changes when driving on sand. On loose sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tires tend to sink into the sand. This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Traction is reduced on hard packed snow and ice and it is easy to lose control. Reduce vehicle speed when driving on hard packed snow and ice. Warning: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Ice conditions vary greatly and the vehicle could fall through the ice; you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only. Driving in Water Warning: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires. Traction could be lost, and the vehicle could roll over. Do not drive through rushing water. Caution: Do not drive through standing water if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts. If the standing water is not too deep, drive through it slowly. At faster speeds, water can get into the engine and cause it to stall. Stalling can occur if the exhaust pipe is under water. Do not turn off the ignition when driving through water. If the exhaust pipe is under water, the engine will not start. When going through water, the brakes get wet and it may take longer to stop. See Driving on Wet Roads later in this section. After Off-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody or chassis, or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, driveline, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. More frequent maintenance service is required. See the Maintenance Schedule.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2157061 CELL ID: 183055 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Driving on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water. Warning: Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:

Allow extra following distance. Pass with caution. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires. Turn off cruise control. Hill and Mountain Roads

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4894384 CELL ID: 183057 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Nov-2017 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills. Warning: Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Warning: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and loss of steering assist. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear. Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash). Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4044908 CELL ID: 183058 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Winter Driving Turn off cruise control. Blizzard Conditions Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror. If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0C (32F) when freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated. Driving on Snow or Ice For Slippery Road Driving:

Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick. Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS). Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

Warning: Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems. For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust. To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160615 CELL ID: 183059 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Oct-2018 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) If the Vehicle Is Stuck Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out later in this section. The Traction Control System (TCS) can often help to free a stuck vehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. If TCS cannot free the vehicle, see Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out following. Warning: If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56km/h (35mph). For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains. Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel Drive High. Turn the TCS off. Shift back and forth between R(Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. See Towing the Vehicle. Recovery hooks can be used, if equipped. Recovery Hooks Warning: Never pull on recovery hooks from the side. The hooks could break and you and others could be injured. When using recovery hooks, always pull the vehicle from the front.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159141 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) Caution: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle, use them if the vehicle is stuck off-road and needs to be pulled some place to continue driving.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4861972 CELL ID: 183061 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Aug-2017 MODIFIED BY: Rosekrans, Dee) Vehicle Load Limits It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. Warning: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping performance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Label Label Example

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2713862 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Jan-2020 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions(1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight(2) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires(3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures(4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires and Tire Pressure. There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See Certification/Tire Label later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicles placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. See Trailer Towing for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. Example 1

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2713863 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example1 = 453kg (1,000lbs) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68kg (150lbs) 2 = 136kg (300lbs) 3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317kg (700lbs) Example 2

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2713865 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example2 = 453kg (1,000lbs) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68kg (150lbs) 5 = 136kg (750lbs) 3. Available Cargo Weight = 113kg (250lbs) Example 3

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2713867 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example3 = 453kg (1,000lbs) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91kg (200lbs) 5 = 453kg (1,000lbs) 3. Available Cargo Weight = 0kg (0lbs) Refer to the vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4822753 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Jun-2017 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The label may shows the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification/Tire label also may show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on the front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread your load equally on both sides of the centerline. The Certification/Tire label may also include information about the Front Axle Reserve Capacity. Warning: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping performance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle. Caution: Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle. The label will help decide how much cargo and installed equipment the truck can carry. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change the weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help load the vehicle the right way. Warning: Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving under Off-Road Driving. SStarting and Operating

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5657599 New Vehicle Break-In CELL ID: 183176 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Caution: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 800km (500mi). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. Avoid making hard stops for the first 300km (200mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased. On new vehicles, the various mechanical and electrical systems experience a break-in period during the first 6,400 km (4,000 miles) of routine driving. As the vehicle is driven, the mechanical systems adjust to provide optimal fuel economy and transmission shift performance. Electrical systems will adapt and calibrate during the break-in period. A one-time occurrence of clicks and similar vehicle noises is normal during this process. Normal driving charges the vehicles battery to achieve the best operation of the vehicle, including fuel economy and the Stop/Start System. See Stop/Start System.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5395873 CELL ID: 183179 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Ignition Positions

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5413223 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Sep-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) Vehicles equipped with Keyless Access have pushbutton starting. The Remote Key must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the Keyless Access system. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation. To shift out of P(Park), the ignition must be on or in Service Mode, and the brake pedal must be applied. Warning: Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF(No Indicator Lights): When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off. If the vehicle is in P(Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power(RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP). If the vehicle is not in P(Park), the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the message SHIFT TO PARK in the Driver Information Center(DIC). When the vehicle is shifted into P(Park), the ignition system will turn off. The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the ignition is turned off and either front door is opened. A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force. 2. Shift the vehicle to N(Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N(Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location. 3. Come to a complete stop. Hold the brake pedal down and shift to P(Park). The vehicle must be in P(Park) to turn the ignition off. 4. Continue to hold the brake pedal down. 5. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake. 6. Press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the ignition off. 7. Release the brake pedal. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds, or press twice in five seconds. ACC/ACCESSORY(Amber Indicator Light): This mode allows some electrical accessories to be used when the engine is off. With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in ACC/ACCESSORY. The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off after five minutes to prevent battery rundown. ON/RUN/START(Green Indicator Light): This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will turn the ignition on. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine. Service Mode This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do when the ignition is on, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Mode. Press the button again to turn the ignition off.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4870857 CELL ID: 183182 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Starting the Engine If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. Caution: If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment. Shift the vehicle into P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N(Neutral) only. Caution: Do not try to shift to P(Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P(Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. Starting Procedure 1. The remote key must be in the vehicle. Press ENGINE START/STOP with the brake pedal applied. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. When the low fuel warning light is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW message is displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), press the ENGINE START/STOP position to continue engine cranking. Caution: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by trying to start the engine immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down. 2. If the engine does not start after five to 10seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 18C or 0F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there while pressing ENGINE START/STOP for up to a maximum of 15seconds. Wait at least 15seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the button and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5678739 CELL ID: 301278 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Stop/Start System Auto Engine Stop/Start This vehicle has a Stop/Start system to shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. It has components designed for the increased number of starts. Warning: The automatic engine Stop/Start feature causes the engine to shut off while the vehicle is still on.Do not exit the vehicle before shifting to P(Park).The vehicle may restart and move unexpectedly. Always shift to P (Park), and then turn the ignition off before exiting the vehicle. When the brakes are applied and the vehicle is at a complete stop, the engine may turn off. When stopped, the tachometer displays AUTO STOP. See Tachometer. When the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is pressed, the engine will restart. To maintain vehicle performance, other conditions may cause the engine to automatically restart before the brake pedal is released. Auto Stops may not occur and/or Auto Starts may occur because:

The climate control settings require the engine to be running to cool or heat the vehicle interior. The vehicle battery needs to charge. The vehicle battery has recently been disconnected. Minimum vehicle speed has not been reached since the last Auto Stop. The accelerator pedal is pressed. The engine or transmission is not at the required operating temperature. The outside temperature is not in the required operating range. The vehicle is shifted out of D (Drive) to any gear other than P (Park). Certain driver modes have been selected. See Driver Mode Control and Four-Wheel Drive. The vehicle is on a steep hill or grade. The driver door has been opened or the driver seat belt has been unbuckled. The hood has been opened. The Auto Stop has reached the maximum allowed time. Auto Stop Disable Switch Uplevel Shown, Others Similar

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5400652 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Sep-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The automatic engine Stop/Start feature can be disabled and enabled by pressing h. Auto Stop/Start is enabled each time you start the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5252111 CELL ID: 183180 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) When the h indicator is illuminated, the system is enabled. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) When the ignition is turned from on to off, the following features (if equipped) will continue to function for up to 10 minutes, or until the driver door is opened. These features will also work when the ignition is in RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY:

Power Windows (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened) Sunroof (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened) Infotainment System Auxiliary Power Outlet Audio System OnStar System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5387266 CELL ID: 183289 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Shifting Into Park Warning: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P(Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake. 2. Press the P(Park) switch on the center stack. 3. Press ENGINE START/STOP to turn the engine off. If the vehicle is shifted into P(Park) on a hill, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) may apply automatically. The driver may not be able to release the EPB using the EPB switch. It should automatically release when the vehicle is shifted out of P(Park). Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running Warning: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire. It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P(Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and shift the vehicle to P(Park). See Shifting Into Park. If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P(Park) with the parking brake set.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5387276 CELL ID: 183290 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Confirm that the vehicle is in P(Park). Shifting out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic transmission. To shift out of P(Park):

1. Ensure the engine is running. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Press or pull the desired shift switch. For N(Neutral) press and hold the N(Neutral) switch until the N indicator illuminates red. 4. The P indicator will turn white and the gear indicator will turn red when the vehicle is no longer in P(Park). If the vehicle cannot shift from P(Park), a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may be displayed. Check that the ignition is on, the engine is running, and the brake pedal is applied when you are attempting to shift out of P(Park). If all of these are met but the vehicle will not shift out of P(Park), see your dealer for service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2347188 CELL ID: 183293 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jan-2017 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) Parking over Things That Burn Warning: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5383495 CELL ID: 325888 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Dynamic Fuel Management If equipped, Dynamic Fuel Management allows the engine to operate in multiple cylinder patterns, up to the full 8-cylinder operation, depending on driving conditions. When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will reduce any combination of operating cylinders enabling the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy. When greater power is required, such as passing or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain full 8-cylinder operation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5415630 CELL ID: 195642 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Extended Parking See Shifting Into Park and Engine Exhaust. It is best not to park with the vehicle running. If the vehicle is left running, be sure it will not move and there is adequate ventilation. If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key outside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 15 minutes. If the vehicle is left parked and running with the remote key inside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to 30 minutes. The vehicle could turn off sooner if it is parked on a hill, due to lack of available fuel. The timer will reset if the vehicle is taken out of P(Park) while it is running. EEngine Exhaust

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2153524 Engine Exhaust Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

CELL ID: 183297 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning: Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired. There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2736264 CELL ID: 183300 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Apr-2017 MODIFIED BY: Patchak, Roxanne) Drive it only with the windows completely down. Have the vehicle repaired immediately. Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park and Engine Exhaust. If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. AAutomatic Transmission

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375727 CELL ID: 183301 Automatic Transmission MODIFIED DATE: 08-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5375733 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jul-2019 OWNER: Landstrom, Michael) The shift switches are on the center stack. The selected gear position will illuminate red on the shift switch, while all others will be displayed in white. If the shift is not immediate, as in very cold conditions, the indicator on the shift switch may blink until it is fully engaged. The transmission does not operate when the vehicle is off. If the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY, the transmission can be shifted into P(Park). If ENGINE START/STOP is pressed twice while at a relatively high speed, the engine will turn off and the transmission will automatically shift to N(Neutral). Once the vehicle is stopped, P(Park) can be selected. P: This position locks the drive wheels. Use P(Park) when starting the engine to prevent the vehicle from moving easily. Warning: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the transmission is not in P(Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and place the transmission into P(Park). See Shifting Into Park and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. This vehicle is equipped with an electronic transmission. The R(Reverse) and D(Drive) shift switches are designed to prevent inadvertent shifting out of P(Park) unless the ignition is on, and the brake pedal is applied. When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP to turn off the vehicle. The transmission will shift to P(Park) automatically. The vehicle will not shift into P(Park) if it is moving too fast. Stop the vehicle and shift into P(Park). To shift in and out of P(Park), see Shifting Into Park and Shifting out of Park. R: Use this gear to back up. If the vehicle is shifted from either R(Reverse) to D(Drive), or D(Drive) to R(Reverse) while the speed is too high, the vehicle will shift to N(Neutral). Reduce the vehicle speed and try the shift again. To shift into R(Reverse):

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Pull the R(Reverse) switch on the center stack. To shift out of R(Reverse):

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Shift to the desired gear. At low vehicle speeds, R(Reverse) can be used to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck. N:

In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N(Neutral) only. Warning: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Caution: Shifting out of P(Park) or N(Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. Caution: The vehicle is not designed to stay in N(Neutral) for extended periods of time. It will automatically shift into P(Park). To shift into N(Neutral), press the N(Neutral) switch until the N indicator is red. To shift out of N(Neutral):

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Shift to the desired gear. Car Wash Mode This vehicle includes a Car Wash Mode that allows the vehicle to remain in N(Neutral) for use in automatic car washes. Car Wash Mode is not to be used for vehicle towing. If the vehicle needs to be towed, see Towing the Vehicle Caution: The vehicle is not designed to stay in N(Neutral) for extended periods of time. It will automatically shift into P(Park) if left in Car Wash Mode. 4. 5. 6. 5. 6. Car Wash Mode (Engine Off Driver in Vehicle) To place the vehicle in N(Neutral) with the engine off and the vehicle occupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Shift to N(Neutral). Turn off the engine and release the brake pedal. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, start the engine and repeat Steps 24. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash. Car Wash Mode (Engine Off Driver out of Vehicle) To place the vehicle in N(Neutral) with the engine off and the vehicle unoccupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Open the door. 4. Shift to N(Neutral). Turn off the engine and release the brake pedal. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, start the engine and repeat Steps 25. 7. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash. 8. The vehicle may automatically shift to P(Park) upon re-entry. Car Wash Mode (Engine On Driver in Vehicle) To place the vehicle in N(Neutral) with the engine on and the vehicle occupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Shift to N(Neutral). 4. Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash. Car Wash Mode (Engine On Driver out of Vehicle) To place the vehicle in N(Neutral) with the engine on and the vehicle unoccupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Open the door. 4. Shift to N(Neutral), then release the brake pedal. 5. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 24. 6. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash. 7. The vehicle may automatically shift to P(Park) upon re-entry. Caution: A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot. Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently. D: This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down. To shift into D(Drive):

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Pull the D(Drive) switch on the center stack. To shift out of D(Drive):

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Shift to the desired gear. Manual Mode Electronic Range Select (ERS) Mode Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under Loss of Control. Caution: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4926528 CELL ID: 183304 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5373800 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Jul-2019 OWNER: Callens, Rebecca) ERS or manual mode allows for the selection of the range of gear positions. Use this mode when driving downhill or towing a trailer to limit the top gear and vehicle speed. The shift position indicator within the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a number next to the L indicating the highest available gear under manual mode and the driving conditions when manual mode was selected. To use this feature:

1. With the vehicle in D(Drive), press the L(Low) button. 2. Press the plus or minus button to increase or decrease the gear range available. When shifting to L(Low), the transmission will shift to a preset lower gear range. For this preset range, the highest gear available is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). All gears below that number are available to use. For example, when 4(Fourth) is shown next to the L, 1(First) through 4(Fourth) gears are shifted automatically. To shift to 5(Fifth) gear, press the +(Plus) button or shift into D(Drive). L(Low) will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high. If vehicle speed is not reduced within the time allowed, the lower gear range shift will not be completed. Slow the vehicle, then press the (Minus) button to the desired lower gear range. While using ERS, cruise control can be used.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5390104 CELL ID: 183308 MODIFIED DATE: 08-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Landstrom, Michael) Tow/Haul Mode The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling. This provides increased performance, vehicle control, and enhanced transmission and engine cooling when driving down steep hills or mountain grades, when towing, or when hauling heavy loads. See Driver Mode Control to activate Tow/Haul Mode. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking See Towing Equipment. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is only enabled while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and the vehicle is not in the Range Selection Mode. See Manual Mode. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle. CELL ID: 183341 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Caution: Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in 4 m and 4 n (if equipped) for an extended period of time. These conditions may cause premature wear on the vehicles powertrain. DDrive Systems

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325065 Four-Wheel Drive If equipped, four-wheel drive engages the front axle for extra traction. Read the appropriate section for transfer case operation before using. Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4 m or 4 n may:

Cause a vibration to be felt in the steering system. Cause tires to wear faster. Warning: If equipped with four-wheel drive, the vehicle will be free to roll if the transfer case is in N(Neutral), even when the shift lever is in P(Park). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear 2m, 4m, or 4n or set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N(Neutral). See Shifting Into Park. Caution: Extended high-speed operation in 4 n may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain. An engagement noise and bump is normal when shifting between 4 n and 4 m or N(Neutral), with the engine running. Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. Automatic Transfer Case Two-Speed Transfer Case

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404920 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) If equipped, the transfer case controls are used to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. To shift the transfer case, press the desired button. The graphic in the instrument cluster will flash while a shift is in progress. The graphic displayed will change to indicate the setting requested. When the shift is complete the graphic will stop flashing. The DIC message turns off once the shift is complete. If the transfer case cannot complete a shift request, it will go back to its last chosen setting. The settings are:

N(Neutral): Use only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See CELL Link Error - Link target cell (cell ID 183572) is invalid for this publication. or Towing the Vehicle. 2m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy. AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): Use when road surface conditions are variable. When driving in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, and the vehicle's power is sent to the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving conditions. This setting provides slightly lower fuel economy than 2m. 4m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use this setting when extra traction is needed, such as when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow. 4n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. Choose 4n when driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, or deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. While driving in 4n, keep vehicle speed below 72 km/h (45 mph). Shifting into 4n will turn Traction Control and StabiliTrak/ESC off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. Shifts between 2m, 4 m, and AUTO Any of these shifts can be made at normal driving speed. The actual 4x4 shift request is only made after the button is released. The 4x4 graphic will remain flashing until the shift request has completed. A DIC message displays to indicate that the 4x4 transfer case has been requested to shift to the new desired state. Once the 4x4 shift has completed, the DIC message disappears, the 4x4 graphic stops flashing, and the current setting is indicated. When a shift to 2m is completed successfully while in P (Park), the parking brake will engage. To resume driving, shift the transmission to the desired gear and manually release the parking brake or press the accelerator pedal to begin driving. See Electric Parking Brake. If equipped, use 4 n, AUTO, or 4 m to provide additional traction when parking on a steep grade with poor traction such as ice, snow, mud, or gravel. Shifting Into 4n 1. The ignition must be on and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5km/h (3mph) with the transmission in N(Neutral). It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6to3.2km/h (1to2mph). 2. Press 4n. The actual 4x4 shift request is only made after the button is released. The 4x4 graphic will remain flashing until the shift request has completed. A DIC message displays to indicate that the 4x4 transfer case has been requested to shift to the new desired state. Once the 4x4 shift has completed, the DIC message disappears, the 4x4 graphic stops flashing and the current setting is indicated. If vehicle speed is higher when shift request occurs, a DIC message displays. Reduce vehicle speed. If the transmission is not in N (Neutral) when shift request occurs, a DIC message displays. The vehicle will allow 20 seconds for the shift to occur. After this time, a graphic in the instrument cluster will indicate that the transfer case is in 4n. Caution: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. If the transmission is not shifted into N (Neutral) or the vehicle has not slowed to 5 km/h (3 mph) within 20 seconds, the transfer case will remain in its original state. This will be indicated in the instrument cluster. With the vehicle moving less than 5km/h(3mph) and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again. Shifting Out of 4n 1. The vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5km/h (3mph) with the transmission in N(Neutral) and the ignition on. It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6to3.2km/h(1to2mph). 2. Press 4m, AUTO, or 2m. The actual 4x4 shift request is only made after the button is released. The 4x4 graphic will remain flashing until the shift request has completed. A DIC message displays to indicate the state of the request. Once the 4x4 shift has completed, the DIC message disappears, the 4x4 graphic stops flashing, and the current setting is indicated. If vehicle speed is higher when shift request occurs, a DIC message displays. Reduce vehicle speed. If the transmission is not in N (Neutral) when shift request occurs, DIC messages will display. The vehicle will allow 20 seconds for this shift to occur. After this time, a graphic in the instrument cluster will indicate that the transfer case is in 4 n. Caution: Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. If the transmission is not shifted into N (Neutral) or the vehicle has not slowed to 5 km/h (3 mph) within 20 seconds, the transfer case will remain in its original state. This will be indicated in the instrument cluster. With the vehicle moving less than 5km/h (3mph), and the transmission in N(Neutral), attempt the shift again. Shifting Into N(Neutral) To shift into N(Neutral):

1. Start the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission to N(Neutral). 3. Shift the transfer case to 2m. 4. Apply the parking brake and/or brake pedal. 5. Press 2m five times in 10 seconds until the N(Neutral) graphic starts flashing in the instrument cluster. When the shift is complete, the graphic stops flashing. If the parking brake and/or brake pedal is not applied within 20 seconds, the transfer case will remain in the original state. 6. If the transmission is not shifted into N (Neutral) or the vehicle has not slowed to 5 km/h (3 mph) within 20 seconds, the transfer case will remain in its original state. This will be indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting Out of N(Neutral) To shift out of N(Neutral):

1. Turn the ignition on with the engine off. See Ignition Positions. 2. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake. 3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 4. Shift the transfer case to 2 m. Transfer case shifts out of N (Neutral) can only be made into 2 m. When the shift to 2 m is complete, the graphic in the instrument cluster will stop flashing. If the transfer case cannot complete a shift, the graphic will return to the previously selected setting. BBrakes

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325623 Electric Brake Boost CELL ID: 317548 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Apr-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Vehicles equipped with electric brake boost have hydraulic brake circuits that are electronically controlled when the brake pedal is applied during normal operation. The system performs routine tests and turns off within a few minutes after the vehicle is turned off. Noise may be heard during this time. If the brake pedal is pressed during the tests or when the electric brake boost system is off, a noticeable change in pedal force and travel may be felt. This is normal.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5179930 CELL ID: 183343 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Nov-2018 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Antilock Brake System (ABS) The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1971505 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Mar-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light. ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot on the brake pedal and does not always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle ahead, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room ahead to stop, even with ABS. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly. Hearing and feeling ABS operate is normal. ABS allows steering and braking at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help even more than braking.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5412400 CELL ID: 209985 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Using ABS Braking in Emergencies Electric Parking Brake

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5412393 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Sep-2019 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) can always be applied, even if the vehicle is off. In case of insufficient electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. To prevent draining the battery, avoid unnecessary repeated cycles of the EPB. The system has a red parking brake status light and an amber service parking brake warning light. See Electric Parking Brake Light and Service Electric Parking Brake Light. There are also parking brake-related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages. Before leaving the vehicle, check the red parking brake status light to ensure that the parking brake is applied. EPB Apply To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. 2. Press the EPB switch momentarily. The red parking brake status light will flash and then stay on once the EPB is fully applied. If the red parking brake status light flashes continuously, then the EPB is only partially applied or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will display. Release the EPB and try to apply it again. If the light does not come on, or keeps flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the red parking brake status light is flashing. See your dealer. If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, press the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light remains on. If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, see your dealer. If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, the vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is pressed. If the switch is pressed until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied. The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system, or at the request of other safety functions that utilize the EPB. If the EPB fails to apply, block the rear wheels to prevent vehicle movement. EPB Release To release the EPB:

1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 3. Press the EPB switch momentarily. The EPB is released when the red parking brake status light is off. If the amber service parking brake warning light is on, release the EPB by pressing and holding the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light is off. If either light stays on after release is attempted, see your dealer. Caution: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. Automatic EPB Release The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5180142 CELL ID: 183346 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System

(ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5152108 CELL ID: 183347 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Warning: Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving. When the vehicle is stopped on a grade, Hill Start Assist (HSA) prevents the vehicle from rolling in an unintended direction during the transition from brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied. If the accelerator pedal is not applied within a few minutes, the Electric Parking Brake will apply. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on HSA to hold the vehicle. HSA is available when the vehicle is facing uphill in a forward gear, or when facing downhill in R (Reverse). The vehicle must come to a complete stop on a grade for HSA to activate. RRide Control Systems

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5438003 Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control System Operation CELL ID: 224813 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems help limit wheel spin and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions. TCS activates if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. StabiliTrak/ESC activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak/ESC selectively applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the intended path. Trailer Sway Control

(TSC) is also on automatically when the vehicle is started. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . If cruise control is being used and traction control or StabiliTrak/ESC begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow. Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle. It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck and Turning the Systems Off and On later in this section. When the transfer case (if equipped) is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, the TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC are automatically disabled, g comes on, and the appropriate message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1991282 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Jan-2020 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will:

Turn on and stay on when either system is not working. See CELL Link Error - Link target cell (cell ID 266976) is invalid for this publication.. If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the DIC, and d comes on and stays on to indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. Without the assistance of properly functioning StabiliTrak/ESC the possibility of rollover is increased. Adjust driving accordingly. Flash when TCS is limiting wheel spin. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC is activated. If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds. 3. Start the engine. Drive the vehicle. If d comes on and stays on, see your dealer. Turning the Systems Off and On

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404916 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) The button for TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Caution: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged. To turn off only TCS, press and release g. The traction off light i displays in the instrument cluster. The appropriate message will display in the DIC. To turn TCS on again, press and release g. The traction off light i displayed in the instrument cluster will turn off. If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning. To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g come on and stay on in the instrument cluster, then release. The appropriate message will display in the DIC. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC on again, press and release g. The traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the instrument cluster turn off. For vehicles without four corner air suspension StabiliTrak/ESC will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h (35 mph). Traction control will remain off. For vehicles with four corner air suspension StabiliTrak/ESC will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) or Hill Start Assist (HSA). Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5422415 CELL ID: 229129 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Hill Descent Control (HDC) If equipped, Hill Descent Control (HDC) sets and maintains vehicle speed while driving down steep grades in a forward or reverse gear. The HDC switch is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404919 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) Press 5 to enable or disable HDC. Vehicle speed must be below 60 km/h (37 mph).

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2440724 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Apr-2010 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna) When enabled, the HDC light displays on the instrument cluster. A blinking HDC light indicates the system is actively applying the brakes to maintain vehicle speed. HDC can maintain vehicle speeds between 1 and 30 km/h (1 and 19 mph) on grades greater than or equal to 5%. If HDC is to be used for more than three minutes or on grades steeper than 25%, the transfer case should be put into Four-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) to reduce the possibility of brake overheating. Noise from the hydraulic brake control module is normal when HDC is active. When HDC is activated, the initial HDC speed is set to the current driving speed. It can be increased or decreased by pressing +RES or SET- on the steering wheel, or by applying the accelerator or brake pedal. This adjusted speed becomes the new set speed. HDC will remain enabled between 30 and 60 km/h (19 and 37 mph); however, vehicle speed cannot be set or maintained in this range. HDC will automatically disable if the vehicle speed is above 80 km/h (50 mph) or above 60 km/h (37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5 must be pressed again to re-enable HDC. HDC may disable after an extended period of use. If this happens, HDC will require time to cool down. The length of time HDC remains active depends on road conditions, grade, set speed, vehicle loading, and outside temperature. When enabled, if the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 mph) and below 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC message will display.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5634218 CELL ID: 225411 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Jul-2020 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Driver Mode Control Driver Mode Control (DMC) allows the driver to adjust the overall driving experience to better suit preference by adjusting multiple sub-system simultaneously. Drive Mode availability and affected vehicle subsystems are dependent upon vehicle trim level, region, and optional features. Normal Mode will be the default mode at every ignition cycle. A unique and persistent indicator will be displayed in the instrument cluster for each mode. Depending on trim level, Normal, Sport, Snow/Ice, Off-Road, Tow/Haul, and Terrain modes may be available.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404920 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) To activate each mode, turn the Mode knob on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404921 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) To activate Terrain mode, press the Terrain Mode button located next to the Mode knob. Normal Mode: Use for normal city and highway driving to provide a smooth ride. This setting provides balance between comfort and handling. This is the standard/default mode. There is no persistent indicator in the instrument cluster for this mode. 88 Sport Mode: Use where road conditions or personal preference demand a more controlled response. When you enter this mode you will immediately feel a down shift. In this mode, the vehicle also monitors driving behaviors and automatically enables Performance Shift Features when spirited driving is detected. These features maintain lower transmission gears to increase available engine braking and improve acceleration response. The vehicle will exit these features and return to normal operation after a short period when no spirited driving is detected. The steering will change to provide more precise control. If the vehicle has Magnetic Ride Control, the suspension will change to provide better cornering performance. 6 Snow/Ice Mode: Snow/Ice improves vehicle acceleration on snow and ice covered roads. When active, Snow/Ice Mode will adjust acceleration to optimize traction on slippery surfaces. This can compromise the acceleration on dry asphalt. This feature is not intended for use when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow, or gravel. If the vehicle becomes stuck see If the Vehicle Is Stuck. 7 Off-Road Mode: Use this mode for off-road recreational driving. Off-Road Mode should be used to improve driving at moderate speeds, on grass, gravel, dirt, unpaved roads, or snow-covered roads. The accelerator pedal is tuned for off-road use. This mode modifies pedal mapping, AWD, steering, ride height, ABS, ESC, and TCS performance. For more information on off-road driving, see Off-Road Driving. _ Tow/Haul Mode: For more information on Tow/Haul Mode, see Tow/Haul Mode.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404921 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) If equipped, select Terrain Mode by pressing the g below the 4 m transfer case button. g Terrain Mode: Use this mode when traveling on very rough roads at very low speeds, such as a two-track or heavily rutted road. This can also be used for pulling a boat out of the water on a trailer. When in Terrain Mode, the vehicle will shift automatically but will hold a lower gear longer to maximize engine torque. This mode has a unique pedal map and transmission shift pattern for better control at lower speeds and over rough terrain. This mode modifies accelerator pedal mapping, transmission shift pattern, ride height, suspension, steering, AWD, eSLD, ESC performance and TCS performance. When the vehicle comes to a stop on an upward grade, Automatic Vehicle Hold is engaged until the driver presses the accelerator pedal. Stop/Start and cruise control are disabled in Terrain Mode. Active Braking during lift throttle will be engaged. This feature automatically applies light braking to simulate heavy engine braking of four-wheel-dive low. It also applies light braking in D (Drive) until the vehicle is at idle speeds. In M1 and M2 light braking will typically bring the vehicle to a stop. Active Braking during lift throttle will also reduce trailer braking. Terrain Mode will automatically exit to Normal Mode if the brake temperatures become too hot, electronic parking brake becomes inoperable or the vehicle cannot perform braking or vehicle hold. For more information on off-road driving, see Off-Road Driving and Hill and Mountain Roads. Minor deceleration when off throttle and mild ability to modulate throttle; mimics performance of 4 n without torque multiplication. Moderate deceleration when off throttle and moderate ability to modulate throttle; will bring vehicle to a stop in most cases. Terrain Mode Drive Select Expected Vehicle Behavior Ideal Terrain Drive (L3-Lx) Grassy fields, mild two tracks, rutted roads, large rolling hills, L2 Mild rock crawling, heavy ruts, Significant deceleration when off throttle and significant ability to modulate throttle; will bring vehicle to a stop in most cases. short, steeper grades, L1 Rock crawling downhill Vehicle Hold Features:

pedal is pressed. When the vehicle comes to a stop on an incline grade in forward gear or on a decline grade in reverse gear, Vehicle Hold is engaged until the accelerator When the vehicle is in forward gear on a decline, the vehicle is allowed to creep down the hill when the brake pedal is released without pressing the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will also creep forward on flat ground. If the driver seat belt is removed and the driver door is opened while the vehicle is being held, EPB will be engaged. EPB will engage if the vehicle is held for an extended period. Terrain Mode is only available on vehicles equipped with the single speed transfer case. Terrain Mode can only be active when:

Vehicle speed is less than 80 km/h (50 mph). The transfer case is in 4 m. Frequent use of this mode may cause brake wear due to the light braking. The vehicle will automatically exit the mode if the brakes get too hot. Terrain Mode can be turned back on after the brakes have cooled. When Terrain Mode is selected:

Auto Engine Start/Stop will be disabled. The Terrain Mode indicator displays on the instrument cluster.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5281308 CELL ID: 183369 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Magnetic Ride Control Locking Rear Axle This vehicle may have a semi-active damping system called Magnetic Ride Control. With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is provided under a variety of passenger and loading conditions.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2346656 CELL ID: 183374 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Feb-2010 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5634219 CELL ID: 323620 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Jul-2020 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Four Corner Air Suspension System The Four Corner Air Suspension feature provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of adjusting ride height for increased convenience and capability. Warning: To help avoid personal injury or death, make sure the area underneath the vehicle and inside the wheel wells is clear when lowering the vehicle. Warning: To help avoid personal injury or death, always select the lowest ride height for the current driving conditions. Higher ride heights raise the vehicle's center of gravity, increasing the chance of a rollover during extreme maneuvers. Warning: Heavy loads on the roof rack will make the vehicle's center of gravity higher, increasing the possibility of a rollover. To avoid losing control of the vehicle, always select the normal height setting and avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers when carrying cargo on the roof rack. Changing Ride Height

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404926 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) Press the Ride Height button to open the Ride Height Menu on the Instrument Panel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5404920 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Sep-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) Turn the knob left or right to select the desired ride height in the menu. To finalize the selection, either press the Ride Height button again or wait three seconds for the menu to timeout. Ride Heights that are unavailable for selection will be greyed out in the menu. Ride Height Descriptions Normal Height is the standard vehicle height used for everyday driving. Entry/Exit Height is 50 mm (2 in) lower than Normal Height. This ride height lowers the vehicle for easy entry and exit from the vehicle as well as providing a lower height for loading and unloading cargo. This ride height can be selected in the Ride Height Menu at any vehicle speed. When Entry/Exit Height is selected at higher speeds, the vehicle will wait to lower until the vehicle slows to less than 12 km/h (7 mph). The vehicle will automatically raise to Normal Height from Entry/Exit Height when speed increases above 8 km/h (5 mph). If no door has been opened since lowering to Entry/Exit Height, the vehicle will wait to raise to Normal Height until 30 km/h (19 mph). This gives the driver more flexibility when lowering to Entry/Exit Height for passenger pick up and drop off. The driver can enable Automatic Entry/Egress Mode to automatically lower to Entry/Exit Height when the vehicle is shifted to P (PARK). Automatic Entry/Egress Mode may be enabled via the infotainment screen under Settings/Vehicle/Ride Height. When the vehicle is higher than Normal Height, Automatic Entry/Egress Mode is disabled. When the vehicle is in Tow/Haul Driver Mode, Off-Road Driver Mode, or it senses a trailer is connected, Automatic Entry/Egress Mode is disabled. Increased Height is 25 mm (1 in) higher than Normal Height. This ride height raises the vehicle for off-road use, allows for higher speeds than Maximum Height, and is only available with specific optional content. Increased Height can be selected in the Ride Height Menu while vehicle speed is less than 80 km/h (50 mph). If vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), the vehicle will automatically lower to Normal Height. Off-Road Driver Mode and Terrain Driver Mode will automatically set Increased Height when vehicle speed is less than 80 km/h (50 mph). If vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), the vehicle will lower to Normal Height. Normal Height will be maintained until vehicle speed is slowed to less than 16 km/h (10 mph) and then the vehicle will automatically raise back to Increased Height. The vehicle will automatically lower from Increased Height to Normal Height to provide improved stability if aggressive maneuvers are detected. Maximum Height is 50 mm (2 in) higher than Normal Height. This ride height raises the vehicle for off-road use and is only available with specific optional content. To raise the vehicle to Maximum Height, first shift the transfer case to 4 n. Once the transfer case is in 4 n and vehicle speed is less than 48 km/hr (30 mph), select Maximum Height in the Ride Height Menu. If vehicle speed exceeds 48 km/h, the vehicle will automatically lower to Increased Height. The vehicle will automatically lower from Maximum Height to Normal Height to provide improved stability if aggressive maneuvers are detected. Aerodynamic Height is 20 mm (0.75 in) lower than Normal Height. This ride height lowers the vehicle at higher vehicle speeds to improve aerodynamics. The vehicle will lower to Aerodynamic Height when vehicle speed exceeds 105 km/h (65 mph) for a period of time. The vehicle will raise to Normal Height when the vehicle slows to less than 48 km/h (30 mph). Aerodynamic Height is automatically disabled when a trailer is connected to the vehicle or Tow/Haul Driver Mode is active. Suspension Modes The air suspension has two special modes located in the infotainment screen under Settings/Vehicle/Suspension. When either is active, the following amber icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5422061 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) See Four Corner Air Suspension Light. Service Mode Service Mode will disable all air suspension operation including raising and lowering the vehicle and operation of the air compressor. This mode is useful when the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed or when any work under the vehicle is being performed. Service Mode is automatically enabled when the vehicle is put on a hoist or a floor jack is used to raise a corner. Service Mode may temporarily enable during intense off-road situations to prevent damaging air suspension activity. Service Mode automatically disables when vehicle speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph). Alignment Mode Alignment Mode will optimize the vehicle height to provide the most accurate wheel alignment. This mode should be enabled once the vehicle is driven onto the alignment station. To enable Alignment Mode, ensure the vehicle is at Normal Height and shift the vehicle to Neutral. Alignment Mode automatically disables when vehicle speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph). Air Suspension Operation with Door(s) or Hood Open The air suspension will temporarily suspend all height changes while the hood or any door is open. If the air suspension is under heavy use, the system may temporarily suspend all height changes to allow compressor cooldown. When this occurs and a height change is requested, a Leveling System Unavailable message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. System Over-Temperature Suspension Lowered for Stability In the event of a loss of Electronic Stability Control, the air suspension will lower the vehicle at higher speeds to provide increased stability. This will be accompanied by a Vehicle Lowering for Stability message in the instrument cluster. If the air suspension detects excessive vehicle loading, it will not raise above Normal Height. Excessive Vehicle Loading Air Suspension Service If a Service Leveling System message is displayed in the instrument cluster, see your authorized dealer immediately. CCruise Control

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4737922 Cruise Control CELL ID: 183382 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Warning: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. If equipped with cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). If the cruise control is being used and the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. If a collision alert occurs when cruise control is activated, cruise control is disengaged. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, cruise control can be turned back on. Turning off the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage the cruise control. If the brakes are applied, cruise control disengages.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4854557 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Nov-2017 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) 5: Press to turn cruise control on or off. A white indicator comes on or off in the instrument cluster. If there is a set speed in memory, press the control up briefly to resume to that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already

+RES:

engaged, use to increase vehicle speed. SET: Press the control down briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already engaged, use to decrease vehicle speed.

*: Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. Setting Cruise Control If 5 is on when not in use, SET or +RES could get pressed and go into cruise when not desired. Keep 5 off when cruise is not being used. 1. Press 5 to turn the cruise system on. 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press and release SET. 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator. Resuming a Set Speed The cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster turns green after cruise control has been set to the desired speed. See Instrument Cluster. If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied or * is pressed, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory. Once the vehicle reaches about 40km/h (25mph) or more, press RES+ up briefly. The vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Do one of the following:

Press and hold +RES up until the desired speed is reached, then release it. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press +RES up briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Do one of the following:

Press and hold SET down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it. To slow down in small increments, press SET down briefly. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing SET will result in cruise control set to the current vehicle speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the vehicle speed, the load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, pressing the accelerator pedal may be necessary to maintain vehicle speed. While going downhill, cruise braking helps maintain driver selected speed. Cruise Grade Braking is enabled when the vehicle is started and cruise control is active. It is not enabled in Range Selection Mode. It assists in maintaining driver selected speed when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle. For other forms of descent control, see Hill Descent Control (HDC), Automatic Transmission, and Tow/Haul Mode. Ending Cruise Control There are four ways to end cruise control:

Step lightly on the brake pedal. Press *. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral). To turn off cruise control, press 5. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if 5 is pressed or the ignition is turned off. DDriver Assistance Systems

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5424479 CELL ID: 219346 Driver Assistance Systems MODIFIED DATE: 24-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems. Warning: Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving. Under many conditions, these systems will not:

Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system. Work at all driving speeds. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate. Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired. Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes. Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To change the volume of the warning chime, see Comfort and Convenience under Vehicle Personalization. Audible Alert Cleaning Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. Driver Information Center (DIC) messages may display when the systems are unavailable or blocked.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5373555 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5373600 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Front and rear bumpers and the area below the bumpers Front grille and headlamps Front camera lens in the front grille or near the front emblem Front side and rear side panels Outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror Side camera lens on the bottom of the outside mirrors Rear side corner bumpers Rear Vision Camera above the license plate

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5674927 CELL ID: 221346 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), Front Park Assist (FPA), Surround Vision, and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5674928 CELL ID: 219358 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Rear Vision Camera (RVC) When the vehicle is shifted into R(Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R(Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press Home or Back on the infotainment system, shift into P(Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12km/h (8mph) while in D (Drive). The rear vision camera is above the license plate.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2719857 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Apr-2016 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 1. View Displayed by the Camera

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2719869 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Apr-2012 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 1. View Displayed by the Camera 2. Corners of the Rear Bumper Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display. A warning triangle may display to show that RPA or RCTA has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object. Warning: The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5674929 CELL ID: 299321 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Surround Vision System If equipped, Surround Vision displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with the front or rear camera views in the infotainment display. The front camera is in the grille or near the front emblem, the side cameras are on the bottom of the outside rearview mirrors, and the rear camera is above the license plate. The Surround Vision system can be accessed by selecting CAMERA in the infotainment display or when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). To return to the previous screen sooner, press any button on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph). Warning: The Surround Vision cameras have blind spots and will not display all objects near the corners of the vehicle. Folding outside mirrors that are out of position may not display surround view correctly. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3944537 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jul-2014 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras 2. Area Not Shown

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3944644 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Jul-2014 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras 2. Area Not Shown Camera Views

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5105947 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Jun-2018 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) Touch the camera view buttons along the bottom of the infotainment display. Front/Rear Standard View: Displays an image of the area in front or behind the vehicle. Touch Front/Rear Standard View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between front and rear camera views. If equipped, the front view camera also displays when the Park Assist system detects an object within 30 cm (12 in). Front/Rear Junction View: Displays a front or rear cross traffic view that shows objects directly to the left and right of the front or back of the vehicle. Touch Junction View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between front and rear camera views. Front/Rear Overhead View: Displays a Front or Rear Overhead View of the vehicle. Touching the button will toggle between the two views. Front/Rear Bowl View: Displays a view of the vehicle from either the front or the back of the vehicle. Touch Bowl View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between forward and rearward views. Park Assist and RCTA are not available when Bowl view is active. Side Forward/Rearward View: Displays a view that shows objects next to the front or rear sides of the vehicle. Touch Side Forward/Rearward View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touching the button multiple times will toggle between forward and rearward views. Park Assist and RCTA overlays are not available when Side Forward/Rearward view is active. Hitch View:

Shifting into P (Park) while in this view will automatically engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB). If equipped, assists while connecting to a trailer. Displays a zoomed-in view of the hitch to help align the vehicles hitch ball with the trailer coupler. Guidance Lines: Displays available guidelines. The horizontal markings represent distance from the vehicle. Top Down View: Displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with other views in the infotainment display. Top Down can be enabled or disabled by pressing the Top Down View button multiple times. If equipped, the feature displays a single, centered guideline on the camera display to assist with aligning a vehicles hitch ball with a trailer coupler. Select the trailer guidance line button, then align the trailer guidance line over the trailer coupler. Continuously steer the vehicle to keep the guidance line centered on the coupler when backing. RVC Park Assist overlays will not display when the trailer guidance line is active. Hitch Guidance is only available in Standard View. To check the trailer when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), touch CAMERA on the infotainment display to view the rear camera. Touch X to exit the view or it will be removed automatically after eight seconds. Warning: Use Hitch Guidance only to help back the vehicle to a trailer hitch or, when traveling above 12 km/h (8 mph), to briefly check the status of your trailer. Do not use for any other purpose, such as making lane change decisions. Before making a lane change, always check the mirrors and glance over your shoulder. Improper use could result in serious injury to you or others.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5674930 CELL ID: 263092 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Hitch Guidance Park Assist The vehicle may be equipped with the Rear Park Assist (RPA) and Front Park Assist (FPA). The Park Assist system may provide assistance to driver while backing up and parking. Park Assist uses ultrasonic sensors in the bumper to measure the distance between the vehicle and objects. The system calculates the distance between vehicle and object via measuring the time it takes for the ultrasonic waves to bounce back from the object. Park Assist works only at speeds up to about 11 Km/h (7 mph). An illuminated indicater light in the parking system is ready to operate. The sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 1.8m

(6 ft) behind and 1.25m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle within a one 25 cm (10) high off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid weather. Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush and clean sensors after a wash in freezing temperatures. Warning: The Park Assist System is no substitute for careful and attentive driving. The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 11km/h (7mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2739659 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Nov-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) How the system works The instrument cluster may have a Park Assist display with bars that show distance to object, driving direction, and object location information for the Park Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red. When an object is very close to the vehicle rear (<0.6m (2 ft)), five beeps will sound from the rear followed by a continuous beep from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When an object is very close to the vehicle front (<0.3m (1 ft)), a continuous beep will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Beeps for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) If equipped, when the vehicle is shifted into R(Reverse), RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20m (65ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right or three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle. Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Turning the Features On or Off The X button located in the customizing menu is used to turn on or off the Park Assist. Front and Rear Park Assist can be set to Off, On, or On with Towbar through vehicle personalization. See Park Assist under Vehicle Personalization. If Park Assist is turned off through vehicle personalization, the Park Assist button will be disabled. To turn the Park Assist on again, select On in vehicle personalization. The On with Towbar setting allows for Park Assist to work properly with an attached trailer hitch. Turn off Park Assist when towing a trailer. To turn the RPA symbols or guidance lines on or off, see Rear Camera and Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. On some models, select the guidance lines button on the infotainment display to turn them on or off.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5028779 CELL ID: 301755 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Hessler, Paul) Rear Pedestrian Alert Rear Pedestrian Alert Indicator Under certain conditions, this feature can provide alerts for a pedestrian within the systems range directly behind the vehicle. This feature only works in R(Reverse) below 12km/h (8mph), and detects pedestrians up to 8m (26ft) away during daytime driving. During nighttime driving, feature performance is very limited.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4969139 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Mar-2018 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) When a pedestrian is detected within the systems range directly behind the vehicle, this symbol flashes amber on the infotainment display, along with two beeps from the rear, or if equipped, two pulses from both sides of the driver seat. When a pedestrian is detected close to the vehicle, the symbol flashes red on the infotainment display, along with seven beeps from the rear, or if equipped, seven pulses from both sides of the driver seat. Warning: Rear Pedestrian Alert does not automatically brake the vehicle. It also does not provide an alert unless it detects a pedestrian, and it may not detect all pedestrians if:

The pedestrian is not directly behind the vehicle, fully visible to the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), or standing upright. The pedestrian is part of a group. The pedestrian is a child. Visibility is poor, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow. The RVC is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice. The RVC, taillamps, or back-up lamps are not cleaned or in proper working condition. The vehicle is not in R(Reverse). To help avoid death or injury, always check for pedestrians around the vehicle before backing up. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving. Keep the RVC, taillamps, and back-up lamps clean and in good repair. Rear Pedestrian Alert can be set to Off or Alert. See Rear Pedestrian Detection in Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. If equipped, alerts can be set to beeps or seat pulses. See Alert Type in Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5674931 CELL ID: 301756 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) System If equipped, when the vehicle is shifted into R(Reverse), RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20m (65ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right or three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle. Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Turning the Feature On or Off Assistance Systems for Driving To turn Rear Cross Traffic Alert on or off, see Rear Camera and Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5388125 CELL ID: 221347 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Trainor, William) If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), and/or Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5386242 CELL ID: 219351 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle too closely. FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60m (197ft) and operates at speeds above 8km/h (5mph). It can detect vehicles to distances of approximately 110m (360ft) and operates at all speeds. Warning: FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving. FCA can be disabled with either the FCA steering wheel control or, if equipped, through vehicle personalization. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2625124 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Apr-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane. Warning: FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair. Collision Alert Tailgating Alert

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2735596 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Nov-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2625124 MODIFIED DATE: 14-Apr-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) The vehicle-ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead too closely. Selecting the Alert Timing The Collision Alert control is on the steering wheel. Press [ / 3 to set the FCA timing to Far, Medium, Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timing may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. The following distance to a moving vehicle ahead in your path is indicated in following time in seconds on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC). The minimum following time is 0.5 seconds away. If there is no vehicle detected ahead, or the vehicle ahead is out of sensor range, dashes will be displayed. Following Distance Indicator Unnecessary Alerts FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. Cleaning the System If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue:

Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror. Clean the entire front of the vehicle. Clean the headlamps. For cleaning instructions, see Washing the Vehicle under Exterior Care. System operation may also be limited under snow, heavy rain, or road spray conditions.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5417870 CELL ID: 319423 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) The AEB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. AEB also includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This Automatic Emergency Braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System. The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 60 km/h (37 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197ft). Warning: AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles. AEB may not:

Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads. Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow. Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes. AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. The vehicle will only hold at a stop briefly. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release AEB. Warning: AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released. Warning: IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed. AEB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. Warning: Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer. A system unavailable message may display if:

The front of the vehicle or windshield is not clean. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with object detection. There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. The AEB system does not need service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5428760 CELL ID: 271030 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System If equipped, the FPB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with nearby pedestrians when driving in a forward gear. FPB displays an amber indicator, ~, when a nearby pedestrian is detected ahead. When approaching a detected pedestrian too quickly, FPB provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps. FPB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This system includes Intelligent Brake Assist

(IBA), and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system may also respond to pedestrians. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB). The FPB system can detect and alert to pedestrians in a forward gear at speeds between 8km/h (5mph) and 80km/h (50mph). During daytime driving, the system detects pedestrians up to a distance of approximately 40m (131ft). During nighttime driving, system performance is very limited. Warning: FPB does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian. FPB may not detect pedestrians, including children:

When the pedestrian is not directly ahead, fully visible, or standing upright, or when part of a group. Due to poor visibility, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow. If the FPB sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice. If the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FPB sensor clean and in good repair. FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake through vehicle personalization. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4060705 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Apr-2015 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) FPB alerts and automatic braking will not occur unless the FPB system detects a pedestrian. When a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicator will display amber. Front Pedestrian Alert

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2735596 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Nov-2011 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) When the vehicle approaches a pedestrian ahead too rapidly, the red FPB alert display will flash on the windshield. Eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front. When this Pedestrian Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Front Pedestrian Alert occurs. Automatic Braking If FPB detects it is about to crash into a pedestrian ahead, and the brakes have not been applied, FPB may automatically brake moderately or brake hard. This can help to avoid some very low speed pedestrian crashes or reduce pedestrian injury. FPB can automatically brake to detected pedestrians between 8km/h

(5mph) and 80km/h (50mph). Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds. If this happens, Automatic Braking may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release Automatic Braking and the EPB. Warning: FPB may alert or automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could falsely alert or brake for objects similar in shape or size to pedestrians, including shadows. This is normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so. Automatic Braking can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See Front Pedestrian Detection in Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. Warning: Using the Front Pedestrian Braking system while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer. Cleaning the System Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) If FPB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3286805 CELL ID: 219357 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) If equipped, the SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone, or blind spot areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5389142 CELL ID: 268599 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Lane Change Alert (LCA) If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone

(or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on. Warning: LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals. LCA Detection Zones

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3289403 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Apr-2013 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) 1. SBZA Detection Zone 2. LCA Detection Zone How the System Works Left Outside Mirror Display The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5m (11ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5m(1.5ft) and 2m(6ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5m(16ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70m(230ft) behind the vehicle. The LCA symbol lights up in the outside mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3275117 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Feb-2013 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) Right Outside Mirror Display

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3275124 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Feb-2013 OWNER: Clark, Lorien) When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right outside mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. LCA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. When you disable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driving on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers). LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or when towing a trailer. The LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care. If the DIC still displays the system unavailable message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer. If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or are rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5372993 CELL ID: 264122 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Lane Keep Assist (LKA) If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings between 60km/h (37mph) and 180km/h (112mph). It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. LKA can be overridden by turning the steering wheel. This system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist and alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering. Warning: The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected. The LKA and LDW systems may not:

Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash. Detect road edges. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera. If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones. Warning: Using LKA while towing a trailer or on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off. How the System Works LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or the driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed. To turn LKA on and off, press A to the left of the steering wheel. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled. When on,A is white, if equipped, indicating that the system is not ready to assist. A is green if LKA is ready to assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. A is amber when assisting. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert by flashing A amber if the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three beeps, or the driver seat may pulse three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction. Take Steering The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The system performance may be affected by:

Close vehicles ahead. Banked roads. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels. Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads. If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help. A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. An LKA or LDW unavailable message may display if the systems are temporarily unavailable. This message could be due to a blocked camera. The LKA system does not need service. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror. LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue. FFuel

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4848009 Top Tier Fuel CELL ID: 298871 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine clean, reduce engine deposits, and maintain optimal vehicle performance. Look for the TOP TIER Logo or see www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2201842 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Apr-2018 OWNER: Dobson, Bert)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5281795 CELL ID: 183392 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Recommended Fuel For diesel engine vehicles, see Fuel for Diesel Engines in the Duramax diesel supplement.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4254614 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Apr-2020 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) Use the recommended fuel for proper vehicle maintenance. Use unleaded petrol with a posted octane rating of 91 RON or higher and with ethanol up to 10% by volume. Otherwise an audible knocking noise may be heard. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 91 RON or higher, the engine needs service.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4848324 CELL ID: 298872 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Prohibited Fuels Caution: Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:

Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, ferrocene, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber parts. Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs. Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4848285 CELL ID: 183396 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Fuel Additives TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highly recommended for use with your vehicle. If your country does not have TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, add ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-Gasoline to the vehicles gasoline fuel tank at every oil change or 15000km (9,000mi), whichever occurs first. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-Gasoline will help keep your vehicles engine fuel deposit free and performing optimally. If you are unable to obtain ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus - Gasoline, consult your dealer for the GM approved additive available in your country.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5298108 CELL ID: 183408 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Filling the Tank If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge. Warning: Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death. Follow these guidelines to help avoid injuries to you and others:

Read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when refueling. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended. Avoid using electronic devices while refueling. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel. Before touching the fill nozzle, touch a metallic object to discharge static electricity from your body. Fuel can spray out if the fill nozzle is inserted too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Insert the fill nozzle slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop before beginning to flow fuel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5154498 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Oct-2018 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) To open the fuel door, push and release the rearward center edge of the door. The capless refueling system does not have a fuel cap. Slowly and fully insert and latch the fill nozzle. Warning: Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:

Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system. Fuel spills. Potential fuel fires. Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait five seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care. Warning: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Filling the Tank with a Portable Gas Can If the vehicle runs out of fuel and must be filled from a portable gas can:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3282763 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Feb-2013 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) Locate the capless funnel adapter. 1. 2. Insert and latch the funnel into the capless fuel system. Warning: Attempting to refuel without using the funnel adapter may cause fuel spillage and damage the capless fuel system. This could cause a fire and you or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. 3. Remove and clean the funnel adapter and return it to the storage location.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375883 CELL ID: 183409 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Filling a Portable Fuel Container Warning: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. To help avoid injury to you and others:

Dispense fuel only into approved containers. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, in a pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Maintain contact until filling is complete. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Avoid using electronic devices while pumping fuel. TTrailer Towing

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4933682 General Towing Information CELL ID: 185693 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Jan-2018 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer. To tow a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see CELL Link Error - Link target cell (cell ID 183572) is invalid for this publication..

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5313553 CELL ID: 183412 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips Warning: You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. Driving with a Trailer When towing a trailer:

Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer. Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer towing. These requirements vary from state to state. State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. Even if not required, you should install extended side view mirrors if your visibility is limited or restricted while towing. Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts. It is recommended to perform the first oil change before heavy towing. During the first 800km (500mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80km/h (50mph) and do not make starts at full throttle. Vehicles can tow in D(Drive). Tow/Haul Mode is recommended for heavier trailers. See Tow/Haul Mode. If the transmission downshifts too often, a lower gear may be selected using Manual Mode. See Manual Mode. If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Super Cruise Control Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Park Assist Automatic Parking Assist (APA) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned to alert or off when towing a trailer:

If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. If equipped with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Warning: When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open. When towing a trailer:

Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust. Also adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See Climate Control Systems in the Index. Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get used to the handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads. The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working. Towing with a Stability Control System When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers. Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns. More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination of the vehicle and trailer will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer than the vehicle alone. It is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Caution: Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle. Make wider turns than normal when towing, so trailer will not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs, trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly. Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes may overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency. The vehicle can tow in D(Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. When towing at higher altitudes, engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at lower altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle could show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P(Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating. Parking on Hills Warning: To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible. When parking your vehicle and your trailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P(Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer. Following Distance Passing Backing Up Making Turns Driving on Grades 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P(Park). 5. Release the brake pedal. Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. Start the engine. Shift into a gear. Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Launching and Retrieving a Boat Backing the Trailer into the Water Warning:

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle before backing onto the sloped part of the ramp. Lower the driver and passenger side windows before backing onto the ramp. This will provide a means of escape in the unlikely event the vehicle slides into the water. If the boat launch surface is slippery, have the driver remain in the vehicle with the brake pedal applied while the boat is being launched. The boat launch can be especially slippery at low tide when part of the ramp was previously submerged at high tide. Do not back onto the ramp to launch the boat if you are not sure the vehicle can maintain traction. Do not move the vehicle if someone is in the path of the trailer. Some parts of the trailer might be underwater and not visible to people who are assisting in launching the boat. Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water to prevent damage to the electrical circuits on the trailer. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. If the trailer has electric brakes that can function when the trailer is submerged, it might help to leave the electrical trailer connector attached to maintain trailer brake functionality while on the boat ramp. To back the trailer into the water:

1. If equipped, place the vehicle in four-wheel-drive high. 2. Slowly back down the boat ramp until the boat is floating, but no further than necessary. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal, but do not shift into P(Park) yet. 4. Have someone place chocks under the front wheels of the vehicle. 5. Gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer. 6. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P(Park). 7. Release the brake pedal. Pulling the Trailer from the Water 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine and shift into a gear. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Let up on the brake pedal. 5. Drive slowly until the tires are clear of the chocks. 6. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. 7. Slowly pull the trailer from the water. drive mode that is appropriate for the road conditions. 8. Once the vehicle and trailer have been driven from the sloped part of the boat ramp, the vehicle can be shifted from four-wheel-drive high. Shift into the Caution: If the vehicle tires begin to spin and the vehicle begins to slide toward the water, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and apply the brake The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule. It is especially important to check the engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system before and during each trip. pedal. Seek help to have the vehicle towed up the ramp. Maintenance when Trailer Towing Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight. Engine Cooling when Trailer Towing Trailer Towing If equipped with a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5422129 CELL ID: 183413 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Caution: Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer. Trailer Weight Warning: Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle. Trailer Weight Ratings Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer. When towing a trailer, the combined weight of the vehicle, vehicle contents, trailer, and trailer contents must be below all of the maximum weight ratings for the vehicle, including:

GCWR: Gross Combined Weight Rating GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Maximum Trailer Weight Rating GAWR-RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating-Rear Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating See Weight-Distributing Hitch and Adjustment under Towing Equipment to determine if equalizer bars are required to obtain the maximum trailer weight rating. See Trailer Brakes under Towing Equipment to determine if brakes are required based on your trailer's weight. The only way to be sure the weight is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items. Warning: You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any fuel, passengers, cargo, equipment, and accessories. Do not exceed the GCWR for your vehicle. To check that the weight of the vehicle and trailer are within the GCWR for the vehicle, follow these steps:

1. Start with the "curb weight. 2. Add the weight of the trailer loaded with cargo and ready for the trip. 3. Add the weight of all passengers. 4. Add the weight of all cargo in the vehicle. 5. Add the weight of hitch hardware such as a draw bar, ball, load equalizer bars, or sway bars. 6. Add the weight of any accessories or aftermarket equipment added to the vehicle. The resulting weight cannot exceed the GCWR value. The gross combined weight can also be confirmed by weighing the vehicle and trailer on a public scale. The vehicle and trailer should be loaded for the trip with passengers and cargo.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5021903 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Mar-2018 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) For information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits. When calculating the GVWR with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying. Maximum Trailer Weight The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has a driver, a front seat passenger, and all required trailering equipment. This value represents the heaviest trailer the vehicle can tow, but it may be necessary to reduce the trailer weight to stay within the GCWR, GVWR, maximum trailer tongue load, or GAWR-RR for the vehicle. Use the Tow Rating Guide (my.chevrolet.com) to determine how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle model and options. Weights listed apply for conventional trailers unless otherwise noted. The weight of the trailer, including the trailer and all cargo in the trailer, cannot exceed the maximum trailer weight rating for the vehicle. The allowable trailer weight might be reduced by the weight of the vehicle options, accessories, passengers, or cargo in the tow vehicle. To determine the maximum trailer weight rating:

1. Find the Gross Combined Weight Rating for the vehicle. 2. Subtract the following:

Vehicle curb weight Weight of the driver and passengers Weight of cargo in the tow vehicle Hitch hardware weight including the draw bar, and equalizer bars Weight of accessories added to the vehicle A step bumper trailer hitch can only support a total trailer weight up to 2271kg (5,000 lb). If a trailer hitch ball is added to the step bumper, check the hitch ball rating to be sure it is higher than the total trailer weight. Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating The Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating is the allowable trailer tongue weight that the vehicle can support using a conventional trailer hitch. It may be necessary to reduce the overall trailer weight to stay within the maximum trailer tongue weight rating while still maintaining the correct trailer load balance.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4956052 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Jan-2018 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Do not exceed a maximum trailer tongue weight of 567kg (1,250lb) for a conventional trailer hitch. The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the curb weight of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment, and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight. Trailer Load Balance The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2744596 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Jan-2015 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 1015% of the total loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owners manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for the vehicle, hitch, and trailer. The trailer load balance percentage is calculated as: weight (1) divided by weight (2) times 100. After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to transfer some of the cargo into your vehicle. If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer. Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and rear axle. If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle or 227kg (500lb), whichever is less. Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR-RR) The GAWR-RR is the total weight that can be supported by the rear axle of the vehicle. Do not exceed the GAWR-RR for the vehicle, with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight-distributing hitch, do not exceed the GAWR-RR after applying the weight distribution spring bars.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5021849 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Mar-2018 OWNER: Goolsby, Matthew) Ask your dealer for trailering information or assistance.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5394039 CELL ID: 183414 MODIFIED DATE: 26-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Towing Equipment Hitches Warning: In order to avoid serious injury or property damage, always follow the hitch manufacturer's instructions when securing your draw bar/coupling device to the vehicle's hitch receiver. Ensure that the draw bar/coupling device is secured with a locking retainer pin or other means such that rotation of the pin or locking mechanism will not cause the pin to back out or loosen during use. Failure to correctly secure the draw bar/coupling device to the receiver can result in separation of the hitch/receiver while towing. Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch. Proper hitch equipment for your vehicle helps maintain control of the vehicle-trailer combination. Many trailers can be towed using a weight-carrying hitch which has a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight between your vehicle and trailer axles. See Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating under Trailer Towing for weight limits with various hitch types. Avoid sharp turns when using a step-bumper hitch to prevent damage. Make wider turns to prevent contact between your trailer and your bumper. Hitch Cover

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5394211 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Callens, Rebecca) To remove hitch cover, if equipped:

1. Remove the two fasteners on the lower tabs (2). 2. Pull the lower edge of the cover to about a 45 degree angle. 3. Pull the cover upward to disengage the upper attachments (1). To reinstall hitch cover:

1. Hold cover at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle and push the upper tabs into the slots in the bumper. 2. Push the bottom of the cover forward until the lower tabs line up with the lower slots. 3. Snap the hitch cover into place by pushing the upper corners forward (1). 4. Reinstall the two fasteners on the lower tabs (2). Consider using mechanical sway controls with any trailer. Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Weight-Distributing Hitch and Adjustment A weight-distributing hitch may be useful with some trailers. Use the following guidelines to determine if a weight-distributing hitch should be used. Trailer Weight Weight-Distributing Hitch Usage Hitch Distribution

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5153263 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Oct-2018 OWNER: Richardson, Lamea) 1. Front of Vehicle 2. H1/H2 Body to Ground Distance Towing 1. Position the truck so that the trailer is ready to connect (Keep trailer detached). 2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening at the fender to the ground (H1). 3. Attach the vehicle to the trailer, do not attach weight distribution bars at this time. 4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to the ground (H2). 5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately H2- [(H2-H1)/2] (half way between the two measured ride heights). 6. Visually inspect the trailer and weight distributing hitch to ensure that the manufacturers recommendations have been met. Up to 2 720kg (6,000lb) Not Required 50%

Required 50%

Over 2 720kg (6,000lb) Measurement Height Example 1500 (mm) H1 1000 H2 1050 H2-H1 50

(H2-H1)/2 25 1025 H2- [(H2-H1)/2]

Towing with the Four Corner Air Suspension System 1. Adjust the vehicle air suspension to "Normal Ground Clearance Height."

2. Position the truck so that the trailer is ready to connect (Keep trailer detached). 3. Enable air suspension Service Mode in the center infotainment screen under Settings/Vehicle/Suspension. 4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening at the fender to the ground (H1). 5. Attach the vehicle to the trailer, do not attach weight distribution bars at this time. 6. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to the ground (H2). 7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers recommendations so thatthe height of the front fender is approximately H2- [(H2-H1)/3] (1/3 between the two measured ride heights, below the secondary ride height {H2}). 8. Disable air suspension air suspension "Service Mode."

9. Air suspension will automatically adjust ride height following step 8. 10. Visually inspect the trailer and weight-distributing hitch to ensure that the manufacturers recommendations have been met. Measurement Height Example 1500 (mm) H1 1000 H2 1060 H2H1 60 20

(H2H1)/3 1040 Tires H2[(H2H1)/3]

Safety Chains Trailer Brakes Do not tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire on the vehicle. Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires for instructions on proper tire inflation. Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer, and attach the chains to the holes on the trailer hitch platform. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer being towed weighs up to 2 271kg (5,000lb) with a factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper; otherwise, safety chains should be attached to holes on the trailer hitch. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Loaded trailers over 900kg (2,000lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended. State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state. Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Never attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle anti-lock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash. Trailer Wiring Harness The seven-pin trailer connector is mounted in the bumper. This connector can be plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector available through your dealer. Use only a round, seven-wire connector with flat blade terminals meeting SAE J2863 specifications for proper electrical connectivity. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:

Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/Turn Signal Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn Signal Grey/Brown: Taillamps White: Ground White/Green: Back-up Lamps Red/Green: Battery Feed Dark Blue: Trailer Brake To help charge a remote (non-vehicle) battery change drive mode to Tow Haul. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul Mode, turn on the headlamps to help charge the battery. Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller. The harness should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center. Refer to the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller owner's manual to determine wire color coding of the electric trailer brake controller. The wire colors on the brake controller may be different from the vehicle. Trailer Lamps Always check all trailer lamps are working at the beginning of each trip, and periodically on longer trips. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When properly connected, the trailer turn signals should will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning, changing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out. Tow/Haul Mode For instructions on how to enter Tow/Haul mode, see Tow/Haul Mode. Tow/Haul assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. Tow/Haul Mode is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR). See Maximum Trailer Weight under Trailer Towing. Tow/Haul Mode is most useful when towing a heavy trailer or carrying a large or heavy load:

through rolling terrain in stop-and-go traffic in busy parking lots Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Mode when lightly loaded or not towing will not cause damage; however, it is not recommended and may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for use with electric trailer brakes or most electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems. These instructions apply to both types of electric trailer brakes.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2322282 MODIFIED DATE: 06-Jan-2015 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) This symbol is on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an ITBC system. The power output to the trailer brakes is proportional to the amount of vehicle braking. This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations. The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicles brake, anti-lock brake, and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicles anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent to the trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak. If the vehicles brake, anti-lock brake, or StabiliTrak systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system may not function fully or at all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to allow the ITBC system to function properly. The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON/RUN. Warning: Connecting a trailer that has an air brake system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking, including increased stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in serious injury, death, or property damage. Only use the ITBC system with electric or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems. Trailer Brake Control Panel

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4911744 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Nov-2017 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) The ITBC control panel is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as Trailer Gain, available to the trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes. Use the ITBC control panel and the DIC trailer brake display page to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes. 2. 3. 1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever Trailer Symbol Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC display page indicates:

Trailer Gain setting Output to the trailer brakes Trailer connection System operational status. To display:

Scroll through the DIC menu pages Press a Trailer Gain (+) or () button Activate the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever TRAILER GAIN:

Press a Trailer Gain button to recall the current Trailer Gain setting. Each press and release of the gain buttons will then change the Trailer Gain setting. Press the Trailer Gain (+) or () to adjust. Press and hold to continuously adjust the Trailer Gain. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with a trailer connected or disconnected. TRAILER OUTPUT: This displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 100% for each gain setting. The Trailer Output will indicate - - - - - - on the Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:

No trailer is connected. A trailer without electric brakes is connected, no DIC message will display A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC There is a fault present in the wiring to the trailer brakes, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC The ITBC system is not working due to a fault, a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the DIC Slide this lever right to apply the trailers electric brakes independent of the vehicles brakes. Use this lever to adjust Trailer Gain to achieve the proper power output to the trailer brakes. This lever may also be used to request additional trailer braking at any time. The trailer's and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle brakes or manual trailer brakes are applied and properly connected. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and it must be readjusted anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change. Warning: Trailer brakes that are over-gained or under-gained may not stop the vehicle and the trailer as intended and can result in a crash. Always follow the instructions to set the Trailer Gain for the proper trailer stopping performance. To adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 32 to 40km/h (20 to 25mph) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake apply lever. Note: Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds lower than 32 to 40km/h (20 to 25mph) may result in an incorrect gain setting. 2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons, to just below the point of trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire Note: Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the 3. Readjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while smoke when a trailer wheel locks. towing condition. towing. Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages TRAILER CONNECTED: This message will briefly display when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about 10 seconds. This message can be acknowledged before it automatically turns off. CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This message will display if:

The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected the vehicle. If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary, this message will automatically turn off in about 30 seconds. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected. If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message will continue until the ignition is turned off. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the trailer brakes. This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged. To determine whether the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Wait 10seconds, then turn the ignition back to RUN. 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message reappears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only reappears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the trailer side. SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM: This message will display when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message continues over multiple ignition cycles, there is a problem with the ITBC system. Have the vehicle serviced. If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays while driving, the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all. When traffic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs service. A GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer. However, any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty. Contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5383752 CELL ID: 183415 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature. Trailer sway is unintended side-to-side motion of a trailer while towing. If the vehicle is towing a trailer and the TSC detects that sway is increasing, the vehicle brakes are selectively applied at each wheel, to help reduce excessive trailer sway. If equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, and the trailer has an electric brake system, StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer brakes.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1991282 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Jan-2020 OWNER: Szydlowski, Corinna)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4911850 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Nov-2017 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) If TSC is enabled, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light will flash on the instrument cluster. Reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. If trailer sway continues, StabiliTrak can reduce engine torque to help slow the vehicle. TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control. Warning: Trailer sway can result in a crash and in serious injury or death, even if the vehicle is equipped with TSC. If the trailer begins to sway, reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. Then pull over to check the trailer and vehicle to help correct possible causes, including an improperly or overloaded trailer, unrestrained cargo, improper trailer hitch configuration, or improperly inflated or incorrect vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing Equipment for trailer ratings and hitch setup recommendations. Aftermarket Electronic Trailer Sway Control Devices Some trailers may come equipped with an electronic device designed to reduce or control trailer sway. Aftermarket equipment manufacturers also offer similar devices that connect to the wiring between the trailer and the vehicle. These devices may interfere with the vehicles trailer brake systems or other systems, including integrated anti-sway systems, if equipped. Messages related to trailer connections or trailer brakes could appear on the DIC. The effects of these aftermarket devices on vehicle handling or trailer brake performance is not known. Warning: Use of aftermarket electronic trailer sway control devices could result in reduced trailer brake performance, loss of trailer brakes, or other malfunctions, and result in a crash. You or others could be seriously injured or killed. Before using one of these devices:

Ask the device or trailer manufacturer if the device has been thoroughly tested for compatibility with the make, model, and year of your vehicle and any optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Before driving, check the trailer brakes are working properly, if equipped. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface that is free of traffic at about 32-40km/h (20-25mph) and fully apply the manual trailer brake apply lever. Also, check the trailer brake lamps and other lamps are functioning correctly. If the trailer brakes are not operating properly at any time, or if a DIC message indicates problems with the trailer connections or trailer brakes, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road when traffic conditions allow. Trailer Tires Special Trailer (ST) tires differ from vehicle tires. Trailer tires are designed with stiff sidewalls to help prevent sway and to support heavy loads. These features can make it difficult to determine if the trailer tire pressures are low only based on a visual inspection. Always check all trailer tire pressures before each trip when the tires are cool. Low trailer tire pressure is a leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Trailer tires deteriorate over time. The trailer tire sidewall will show the week and year the tire was manufactured. Many trailer tire manufacturers recommend replacing tires more than six years old. Overloading is another leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Never load your trailer with more weight than the tires are designed to support. The load rating is located on the trailer tire sidewall. Always know the maximum speed rating for the trailer tires before driving. This may be significantly lower than the vehicle tire speed rating. The speed rating may be on the trailer tire sidewall. If the speed rating is not shown, the default trailer tire speed rating is 105km/h (65mph). CConversions and Add-Ons

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5449684 CELL ID: 183417 Add-On Electrical Equipment MODIFIED DATE: 26-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Warning: The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light). A device connected to the DLC such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicles systems. Caution: Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. Warning: Certain mobile radio equipment, like amplifiers and antennas used for two-way communication, can interfere with some vehicle systems. Always ensure this equipment is supplied with proper local grounding. Follow all of the instructions that came with the equipment and see your GM dealer for additional mobile radio installation instructions. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle. Vehicle Care GGeneral Information

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5396231 General Information Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

CELL ID: 183237 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5387770 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Rogers-Caleel, Donna)

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2160458 CELL ID: 183240 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Accessories and Modifications Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician. Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle. VVehicle Checks

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3471289 Doing Your Own Service Work CELL ID: 183247 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Jun-2013 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Warning: It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owners manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work. If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle. Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. Caution: Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325071 CELL ID: 183248 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Hood Warning: For vehicles with auto engine stop/start, turn the vehicle off before opening the hood. If the vehicle is on, the engine will start when the hood is opened. You or others could be injured. Warning: Components under the hood can get hot from running the engine. To help avoid the risk of burning unprotected skin, never touch these components until they have cooled, and always use a glove or towel to avoid direct skin contact. Clear any snow from the hood before opening. To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever with the i symbol.It is on the lower left side of the instrument panel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248818 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary release lever under the front center of the hood. Push the secondary hood release lever to the right to release. 3. After you have partially lifted the hood, the gas strut system will automatically lift the hood and hold it in the fully open position. To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly, and all tools are removed. 2. Pull the hood down until the gas strut system is no longer holding up the hood. 3. Allow the hood to fall.Check to make sure the hood is latched completely. Repeat this process with additional force if necessary. Warning: Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message if the hood is not fully closed, and the vehicle is moving.Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325072 CELL ID: 183250 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Apr-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Engine Compartment Overview

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248819 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Remote Negative(). See Jump Starting. 2. Positive(+) Terminal. See Jump Starting. 3. Battery. 4. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. 5. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil. 6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System. 7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil. 8. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System. 9. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. 10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid. 11. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid under Washer Fluid.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5154532 CELL ID: 183252 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Engine Oil For diesel engine vehicles, see Engine Oil in the Duramax diesel supplement. To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:

Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See Checking Engine Oil and When to Add Engine Oil in this section. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System. Always dispose of engine oil properly. See What to Do with Used Oil in this section. Checking Engine Oil Check the engine oil level regularly, every 650km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview for the location. Warning: The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle. If a low oil Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays, check the oil level. Follow these guidelines:

To get an accurate reading, park the vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the engine oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level. If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4631405 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Nov-2016 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See Selecting the Right Engine Oil later in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications. Caution: Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If the oil level is above the operating range (i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range), the engine could be damaged. Drain the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle, and seek a service professional to remove the excess oil. See Engine Compartment Overview for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Selecting the Right Engine Oil Specification Use full synthetic engine oils that meet the dexos1 specification. Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4753336 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Mar-2017 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) Caution: Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Viscosity Grade Use SAE0W-20 viscosity grade engine oil. When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See Specification earlier in this section. Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4943980 CELL ID: 183253 MODIFIED DATE: 27-Mar-2018 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. On some vehicles, when the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil change is necessary. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1000km (600mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. For vehicles without the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message, an oil change is needed when the REMAINING OIL LIFE percentage is near 0%. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5000km (3,000mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the oil life percentage on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. Press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel, or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC controls, for several seconds. When the confirmation message displays, select YES. The oil life will change to 100%. The oil life system can also be reset as follows:

1. Display the oil life percentage on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. 3. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds. If the display changes to 100%, the system is reset. If the vehicle has a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message and it comes back on when the vehicle is started and/or the oil life percentage is near 0%, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3806855 CELL ID: 183255 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Apr-2014 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheated transmission. This vehicle is not equipped with a transmission fluid level dipstick. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid in these vehicles. Because this procedure is difficult, this should be done at the dealer. Contact the dealer for additional information. Caution: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375560 CELL ID: 301326 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Engine Air Filter Life System If equipped, this feature provides the engine air filters remaining life and best timing for a change. The timing to change an engine air filter depends on driving and environmental conditions. When to Change the Engine Air Filter When the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays a message to replace the engine air filter at the next oil change, follow this timing. When the DIC displays a message to replace the engine air filter soon, replace the engine air filter at the earliest convenience. The system must be reset after the engine air filter is changed. If the DIC displays a message to check the engine air filter system, see your dealer. How to Reset the Engine Air Filter Life System To reset:

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park). 2. Display the Air Filter Life on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). 3. Press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to move to the Reset/Disable display area. Select Reset then press the thumbwheel for several seconds.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325073 CELL ID: 183258 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jan-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) 4. Press the thumbwheel to confirm the reset. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter The engine air cleaner/filter is on the driver side of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview . When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine air filter life system see your dealer for intervals on inspecting and replacing the engine air cleaner filter. How to Inspect/Replace the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris. Do not clean the engine air cleaner/filter or components with water or compressed air. To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248820 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Remove the three screws, tilt the cover, and slide it out of the assembly. Warning: If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with one of the same part number or with an equivalent part. Use of a replacement part without the same fit, form, and function may result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Lower the cover, slide it into the assembly, then secure with the three screws. 2. 3. 4. If equipped, reset the engine air filter life system after replacing the engine air filter. See Engine Air Filter Life System. Warning: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. Use caution when working on the engine. Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle with the air cleaner/filter off, as flames may be present if the engine backfires. Caution: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when driving.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325074 CELL ID: 183259 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Apr-2020 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248821 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Engine Electric Cooling Fans 2. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap Warning: An underhood electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Warning: Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle. The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating. Engine Coolant What to Use Warning: Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. This mixture:

Gives freezing protection down to 37C (34F), outside temperature Gives boiling protection up to 129C (265F), engine temperature Protects against rust and corrosion Will not damage aluminum parts Helps keep the proper engine temperature Caution: Do not use anything other than a mix of DEX-COOL coolant that meets GM Standard GMW3420 and clean, drinkable water. Anything else can cause damage to the engine cooling system and the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, or by pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health. Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is in the engine compartment on the drivers side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview . The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248822 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, wait until it cools down. The coolant level should be at or above the full cold mark. If it is not, there may be a leak in the cooling system. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark, see How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank, following. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank Warning: Spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Warning: Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Warning: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool. Caution: Failure to follow the specific coolant fill procedure could cause the engine to overheat and could cause system damage. If coolant is not visible in the surge tank, contact your dealer. If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2200184 MODIFIED DATE: 03-May-2010 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248822 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the full cold mark. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates approximately 90C

(195F). By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the full cold mark. 5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. 6. Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 16. Caution: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325075 CELL ID: 183261 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Engine Overheating Caution: Running the engine without coolant may cause damage or a fire. Vehicle damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is a coolant temperature gauge and an engine coolant temperature warning light in the vehicle's instrument cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light. In addition, there are ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the Driver Information Center (DIC). If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Check to see if the engine cooling fan(s) are running. If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced. Caution: Do not run the engine if there is a leak in the engine cooling system. This can cause a loss of all coolant and can damage the system and vehicle. Have any leaks fixed right away. If Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment Warning: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool. If No Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem. If there is an engine overheat warning, but no steam is seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:

Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing. Turn the air conditioning off. 1. 2. If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message appears with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary. 3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral), and let the engine idle. If the engine coolant temperature gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away. If there is still no sign of steam and the vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while the vehicle is parked. If the warning is still there, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for five minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3302467 CELL ID: 183263 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Feb-2013 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) Engine Fan If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, the fans may be heard spinning at low speed during most everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, high outside temperatures, or operation of the air conditioning system, the fans may change to high speed and an increase in fan noise may be heard. This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required. The electric engine cooling fans may run after the engine has been turned. off. This is normal and no service is required.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2884540 CELL ID: 183265 MODIFIED DATE: 08-May-2017 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) Washer Fluid What to Use Adding Washer Fluid When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing. The vehicle has a low washer fluid message on the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays, washer fluid will need to be added to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1986893 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview for reservoir location. Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5387565 CELL ID: 183266 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Caution:

system. Brakes Disc brake linings have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake linings are worn and new linings are needed. The sound can come and go or can be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly. Warning: The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Caution: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake linings could result in costly brake repairs. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied, clearing up following several applications. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake linings for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications. Brake pads should be replaced as complete axle sets. See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required. Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance can change in many ways if the wrong brake parts are installed or if parts are improperly installed.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5387618 CELL ID: 301493 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Brake Pedal Travel Replacing Brake System Parts Brake Pad Life System When to Change Brake Pads This vehicle has a system that estimates the remaining life of the front and rear brake pads. Brake pad life is displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), along with a percentage for each axle. The system must be reset every time the brake pads are changed. When the system has determined that the brake pads need to be replaced, a message will display, which may include mileage remaining. Brake pads should always be replaced as complete axle sets. How to Reset the Brake Pad Life System The system will automatically detect when significantly worn brake pads are replaced. When the ignition is turned on after new pads and wear sensors are installed, a message will display. Follow the prompts to reset the system. The brake pad life system can also be manually reset:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. Select the Brake Pad Life menu. 3. Select front or rear pads as appropriate. 4. Select YES on the confirmation message. Repeat for pads on the other axle if they were also replaced. How to Disable the Brake Pad Life System The brake pad life system can be turned off. This may be necessary if aftermarket brake pads without wear sensors are installed. When the system is turned off, the front and rear brake pad life percentages will not display. However, the built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn can still determine when the pads should be replaced. See Brakes. 1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). To turn off the brake pad life system:

2. Select the Brake Pad Life menu. 3. Select DISABLE. To turn the brake pad life system back on, follow the above steps but select ENABLE in Step 2.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2894628 CELL ID: 183267 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Brake Fluid

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1987353 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Feb-2013 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview for the location of the reservoir. Checking Brake Fluid With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down:

Normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Warning: If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light. Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule. Use only GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Warning: The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid. Caution: If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5154274 CELL ID: 183268 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Oct-2018 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) What to Add Battery The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid. Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview for battery location. The vehicle has an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt battery. Installation of a standard 12-volt battery will result in reduced 12-volt battery life. When using a 12-volt battery charger on the 12-volt AGM battery, some chargers have an AGM battery setting on the charger. If available, use the AGM setting on the charger, to limit charge voltage to 14.8 volts. Follow the charger manufacturer's instructions. Stop/Start System This vehicle has a Stop/Start system to shut off the engine to help conserve fuel. See Stop/Start System.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2445875 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Apr-2010 OWNER: Tanner, Norm) Warning: Do not use a match or flame near a vehicle's battery. If you need more light, use a flashlight. Do not smoke near a vehicle's battery. When working around a vehicles battery, shield your eyes with protective glasses. Keep children away from vehicle batteries. Warning: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be hurt badly if you are not careful. Follow instructions carefully when working around a battery. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which can cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative() cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative() cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5028179 CELL ID: 183274 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Mar-2018 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) after handling. Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant How to Check Lubricant Refer to Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the lubricant. If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole, located on the transfer case, some lubricant will need to be added. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2884404 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jun-2012 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. When to Change Lubricant Refer to Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. What to Use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants to determine what kind of lubricant to use.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5163020 CELL ID: 183275 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Nov-2018 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Front Axle When to Check Lubricant Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. This service can be complex. See your dealer. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5163053 CELL ID: 183276 MODIFIED DATE: 01-Nov-2018 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) It is not necessary to regularly check the rear axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. This service can be complex. See your dealer. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2208731 CELL ID: 188669 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check Warning: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N(Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. To check the P(Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P(Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5396218 CELL ID: 183279 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 MODIFIED BY: Callens, Rebecca) Caution: Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield. Contact your dealer if service is required. Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts. Front Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4261817 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Dec-2015 OWNER: Liu, Chen) 2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm connector, and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector. 3. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Reverse Steps 13 for wiper blade replacement. Rear Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the off position, open the liftglass to access the rear wiper arm/blade. The rear wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so use care when pulling it away from the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714979 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Dobson, Bert) 2. Push the release lever (2) to disengage the hook and push the wiper arm (1) out of the blade assembly (3). 3. Push the new blade assembly securely in the wiper arm hook until the release lever clicks into place. 4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the rest position on the glass.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2412450 CELL ID: 207985 MODIFIED DATE: 08-May-2017 MODIFIED BY: Clark, Lorien) If the windshield or front side glass must be replaced, see your dealer to determine the correct replacement glass.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4830696 CELL ID: 183280 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Jun-2017 MODIFIED BY: DiDominicis, David) If the windshield needs to be replaced and the vehicle is equipped with a front camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, a GM replacement windshield is recommended. The replacement windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for proper alignment. If it is not, these systems may not work properly, they may display messages, or they may not work at all. See your dealer for proper windshield replacement.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4603584 CELL ID: 291784 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) This vehicle is equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position. Warning: If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate is held open with enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced. Caution: Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle. Glass Replacement Windshield Replacement Driver Assistance Systems Gas Strut(s) See Maintenance Schedule. Hood

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4602810 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Oct-2016 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) Trunk

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4602812 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Oct-2016 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) Liftgate

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4602813 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Oct-2016 OWNER: Cusenza, Mark) HHeadlamp Aiming

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2324970 Front Headlamp Aiming CELL ID: 183292 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer. CELL ID: 183456 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) BBulb Replacement

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4862770 Bulb Replacement LED Lighting For the proper type of replacement bulbs, or any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Caution: Do not replace incandescent bulbs with aftermarket LED replacement bulbs. This can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2605186 CELL ID: 205022 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5396238 CELL ID: 183486 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Trainor, William) Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps Base Level Taillamp Assembly

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5396367 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 1. Stop Lamp 2. Turn Signal Lamp 3. Back-Up Lamp To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. It is recommended to replace the grommets when replacing a bulb. See your dealer.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5429238 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 2. Remove the middle trim piece by pulling towards the center of the vehicle to disengage the clips.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5429239 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 3. Remove the lower taillamp closeout cover from the taillamp assembly by pulling rearward from the top and bottom to disengage the clips.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5396230 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 4. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5396234 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 5. Pull the rear lamp assembly rearward to remove it from the vehicle. 6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket. 8. Replace the bulb and reverse Steps 16 to reinstall. EElectrical System

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5695747 Electrical System Overload CELL ID: 183499 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy) The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload. When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems. Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle. If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible. To check a fuse, look at the band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a fuse of the identical size and rating.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5696080 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Dec-2020 OWNER: Salter, Amy)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5696081 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Dec-2020 OWNER: Salter, Amy) Replacing a Blown Fuse Turn off the ignition. 1. 2. Locate the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse block.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5696082 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Dec-2020 OWNER: Salter, Amy)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5696083 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Dec-2020 OWNER: Salter, Amy) 3. Use the fuse puller to remove the fuse from the top or side, as shown above. 4. If the fuse must be replaced immediately, borrow a replacement fuse with the same amperage from the fuse block. Choose a vehicle feature that is not needed to safely operate the vehicle. Repeat Steps2-3. 5. Insert the replacement fuse into the empty slot of the blown fuse. At the next opportunity, see your dealer to replace the blown fuse. An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off. Headlamp Wiring Windshield Wipers If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5695833 CELL ID: 183501 MODIFIED DATE: 16-Dec-2020 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy) Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems. Danger: Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5640989 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Aug-2020 OWNER: Salter, Amy) Warning: Installation or use of fuses that do not meet GMs original fuse specifications is dangerous. The fuses could fail, and result in a fire. You or others could be injured or killed, and the vehicle could be damaged. See Accessories and Modifications and General Information. To check or replace a blown fuse, see Electrical System Overload.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5391129 CELL ID: 183502 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Engine Compartment Fuse Block The engine compartment fuse block is in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2322995 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Apr-2012 OWNER: Todd, David) Lift the cover to access the fuse block. Caution: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5390972 Fuses Usage MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ELM 7 ELM 4 ELM 5 ELM 6 Spare Washer front Washer rear Rec 2 Power sounder DC/AC inverter Spare IECR2 17 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 Camera wash Headlamp RT Headlamp LT IECL2 EBCM REC 1 27 Horn 28 ELM 3 ELM 1 Not R/C OBD body MISC body Upfitter MISC IP Trailer parking lamps Right taillamp Trailer tow 45 46 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 Secondary axle motor ECM ignition OBD engine TCM 50 A/C clutch TCCM Front wiper Left taillamps Trailer back up lamp SADS Spare Starter motor AFM1 ALC main ICCM/CVS/DEF Trailer brake AUX UEC Left cool fan motor AFM2 ALC motor Starter pinion Cool fan motor lower Right cool fan motor/Lower Left trailer stop turn lamp ELEC RNG BDS Cabin cool pump 17W Right trailer stop turn lamp TIM 2 DEFC ECM TIM 1 FTZM Engine ECM 87 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 88 89 90 91 92 5 18 Trailer battery Injector B even 02 B sensor 02 A sensor Injector A odd ECM throttle control Cool fan clutch AERO shutter Relays Usage DC/AC inverter 23 35 36 43 59 64 70 77 Park lamp Run/Crank A/C clutch Starter motor Starter pinion Powertrain Secondary axle motor

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5337745 CELL ID: 183504 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Instrument Panel Fuse Block

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 3453978 MODIFIED DATE: 31-May-2013 OWNER: Todd, David) The right instrument panel fuse block access door is on the passenger side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5393747 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) There are relays on the back of the fuse block. To access, press the tabs and remove the fuse block. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Fuses Usage UGDO/OHC/camera Right door Left door BCM 2 Displays F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 F10 F11 F12 F14 Front blower Left door panel Tilt/column lock USB/DLC CGM/onstar Right door panel Steering wheel control F17 F18 AVM 1 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 Heated wheel SEO/UPFITTER USB/SEO RAP APO/RAP SDM AOS CSM/USB F28 Spare F30 F31 BCM 3 F32 F33 BCM 4 F34 F40 F41 F42 F43 RSE F44 AVM 2 F45 Out of park Radio module Electric park brake switch F46 BCM 1A BCM 1 F47 F48 TCM F49 F50 DMS F51 F52 F53 F54 Sunroof F55 APO 3 F56 F57 F58 Spare F59 CBO1 APO1 CBO2 APO2 Relays Usage K1 K2 K4 K5 RAP/ACCY 1 RAP/ACCY 2 DC/DC CNV BATT 1 DC/DC CNV BATT 2 Circuit Breakers Usage

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5393093 CELL ID: 183506 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Rear Compartment Fuse Block

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397853 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) The rear compartment fuse block is behind the access panel on the left side of the compartment. Pull the panel out by grabbing the finger access slot at the rear edge.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5392849 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Apr-2020 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown. Fuses Usage F01 RFA F02 WCM F03 F04 F05 MSM driver Heated seat module row 1 (Battery 1) Amp aux 2 SEO UPFTR 2 Motor seatbelt passenger Power folding seat row 2 Heated seat module row 1 (Battery 2) RH CINCH latch Memory seat module passenger Rear wiper Motor seatbelt driver Rear defogger Rear HVAC display control F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 GBS F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 EOCM F24 Amp aux 3 F25 OBS DET F26 RDCM F27 F28 VPM Amp aux 1 F29 F30 F31 Amp F32 F33 ICCM F34 F35 HFCR F36 ELM F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 UPA F44 F45 F46 F47 F48 F49 F50 F51 Heated seat module row 2 Power slide console AFL AHL Rear HVAC blower motor LH CINCH latch Power seat recline module Lift glass Driver power seat Power liftgate module Passenger power seat F52 K53 K54 K55 L/GLASS WWheels and Tires

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2374661 Tires Warning:

CELL ID: 183530 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only your dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode. See Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation for inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed driving.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2629342 CELL ID: 216940 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) All-Season Tires This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-

season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be MS. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2676863 CELL ID: 183531 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Winter Tires If using winter tires:

This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires. With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires. Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679496 CELL ID: 183533 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Low-Profile Tires If the vehicle has 275/50R22 size tires, they are classified as low-profile tires. Caution: Low-profile tires are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible, avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5424556 CELL ID: 183537 MODIFIED DATE: 17-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Warning: Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:

Tire overloading and overheating, which could lead to a blowout. Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:

Premature or irregular wear. Poor handling. Reduced fuel economy. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage from road hazards. The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity. For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits. How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. When to Check Check the pressure of the tires once a month or more. How to Check Do not forget the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. See Full-Size Spare Tire for additional information. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6km (1mi). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture.Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM.TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679413 CELL ID: 183538 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation Warning: Driving at high speeds, 160km/h (100mph) or higher, puts additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure. This could cause a crash, and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow the vehicle to be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, are in excellent condition, and are set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load. Vehicles with tire sizes listed in the High Speed Operation Inflation Pressures table require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to the corresponding value in the table for the tire size on the vehicle. High Speed Operation Inflation Pressures Tire Size Cold Inflation Pressure kPa (psi) 275/50R22 111H 270 kPa (39 psi) Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits and Tire Pressure.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2969412 CELL ID: 183541 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Tire Pressure Monitor System Caution: Modifications made to the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) by anyone other than an authorized service facility may void authorization to use the system. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-

inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5509138 CELL ID: 183542 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation for additional information. Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1970731 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits. A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure. A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits , for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure. The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection , Tire Rotation and Tires. Caution: Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions. TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:

One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on. This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure. Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped) When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. Place the vehicle in P (Park). 4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid. Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light. Warning: Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall. If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure, while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once. If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working. If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly. The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:

There is interference from an external device or transmitter. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. There is a malfunction in the TPMS. There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps. The identification code of the TPMS sensor is not registered to the system. The battery of the TPMS sensor is low. If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again. If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge. TPMS Sensor Matching Process Auto Learn Function Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. When a tire is installed, the vehicle must be stationary for about 20 minutes before the system recalculates. The following relearn process takes up to 10 minutes, driving at a minimum speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). A dash (-) or pressure value will display in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC). A warning message displays in the DIC if a problem occurs during the relearn process.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2374690 CELL ID: 183545 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month. Tire Inspection Replace the tire if:

The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. Tire Rotation Tires should be rotated every 10000 km. See Maintenance Schedule. Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679424 CELL ID: 183546 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1979446 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires. Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure and Vehicle Load Limits. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation. Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications. Warning: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt. Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up. Warning: Do not apply grease to the wheel mounting surface, wheel conical seats, or the wheel nuts or bolts. Grease applied to these areas could cause a wheel to become loose or come off, resulting in a crash.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5420662 CELL ID: 183548 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) When It Is Time for New Tires Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1970752 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6mm (1/16in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection and Tire Rotation for additional information. The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date, which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year. Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber. Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5423265 CELL ID: 183549 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating. GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle. See Tire Rotation. Warning: Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires. Warning: Mixing tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on the vehicle), brands, tread patterns, or types may cause loss of vehicle control, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tire on all wheels. Warning: Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating. If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires. The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2147539 CELL ID: 183550 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Different Size Tires and Wheels If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected. Warning: If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2147500 CELL ID: 183554 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) See Buying New Tires and Accessories and Modifications. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2813440 CELL ID: 183556 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts. Warning: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Caution: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains Warning: Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375501 CELL ID: 183557 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Jul-2019 MODIFIED BY: Callens, Rebecca) Warning: If the vehicle has 275/60R20 or 275/50R22 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it is contacting the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the rear tires. Caution: If the vehicle is equipped with a tire size other than 275/60R20 or 275/50R22, use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5508957 CELL ID: 183559 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there ever is a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible. Warning: Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible. Warning: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers. Warning: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Shift the vehicle to P(Park). 4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. 3. For vehicles with four-wheel drive with an N (Neutral) transfer case position, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N(Neutral). 6. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed. This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jacking equipment to change a spare tire safely, follow the instructions below. Then see Tire Changing. To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. When the vehicle has a flat tire(2), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks(1), if equipped.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2713871 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Wheel Block (If Equipped) 2. Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 3275231 CELL ID: 183560 MODIFIED DATE: 11-Mar-2015 MODIFIED BY: Rosekrans, Dee) Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Warning: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust. Warning: Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed the recommended pressure. Warning: Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit, there may not be a spare tire or tire changing equipment, and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire. The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714345 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Feb-2013 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve 2. Sealant/Air Hose 3. Base of Sealant Canister 4. Tire Sealant Canister 5. On/Off Button 6. Slot on Top of Compressor 7. Pressure Deflation Button 8. Pressure Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714346 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 9. Power Plug 10. Air Only Hose Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the tire sealant canister (4). Check the tire sealant expiration date on the tire sealant canister. The tire sealant canister (4) should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement tire sealant canisters are available at your local dealer. There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the tire sealant canister must be replaced. Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for five minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers. See If a Tire Goes Flat for other important safety warnings. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant canister (4) and compressor from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. 2. Remove the air only hose (10) and the power plug (9) from the bottom of the compressor. 3. Place the compressor on the ground near the flat tire.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714347 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Dec-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 4. Attach the air only hose (10) to the sealant canister inlet valve (1) by turning it clockwise until tight.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714348 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 canister (3) into the slot on the top of the compressor (6) to hold it upright. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 6. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 5. Slide the base of the tire sealant

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714350 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Jan-2013 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) to the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until tight. 8. Plug the power plug (9) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor. 10. Press the on/off button (5) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire. The pressure gauge (8) will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only. 11. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (8). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure. The pressure gauge (8) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached. Caution: If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. 12. Press the on/off button (5) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire. Therefore, Steps 1321 must be done immediately after Step 12. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 13. Unplug the power plug (9) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem. 15. Replace the tire valve stem cap. 16. Remove the tire sealant canister (4) from the slot on top of the compressor (6). 17. 18. Turn the air only hose (10) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire sealant canister inlet valve (1). Turn the sealant/air hose (2) clockwise onto the sealant canister inlet valve (1) to prevent sealant leakage. 19. Return the air only hose (10) and power plug (9) back to their original storage location.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2360199 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Mar-2012 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 20. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure, remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister and place it in a highly visible location. Do not exceed the speed on this label until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced. 21. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle. 22. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the sealant in the tire. 23. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to Steps 110 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured). If the tire pressure has fallen more than 68kPa (10 psi) below the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire. If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 68kPa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. 24. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, or vehicle. 25. Dispose of the used tire sealant canister (4) at a local dealer or in accordance with local state codes and practices. 26. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer. 27. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer within 161 km (100 mi) of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced. Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured) The kit includes:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714345 MODIFIED DATE: 28-Feb-2013 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve 2. Sealant/Air Hose 3. Base of Sealant Canister 4. Tire Sealant Canister 5. On/Off Button 6. Slot on Top of Compressor 7. Pressure Deflation Button 8. Pressure Gauge

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2714346 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Oct-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 9. Power Plug 10. Air Only Hose If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers. See If a Tire Goes Flat for other important safety warnings. 1. Remove the compressor from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. 2. Remove the air only hose (10) and the power plug (9) from the bottom of the compressor. 3. Place the compressor on the ground near the flat tire. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Attach the air only hose (10) to the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until tight. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor. 6. Plug the power plug (9) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets. 8. Press the on/off button (5) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. The compressor will inflate the tire with air only. 9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (8). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure. The pressure gauge (8) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached. Caution: If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. 10. Press the on/off button (5) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. Be careful while handling the compressor as it could be warm after usage. 11. Unplug the power plug (9) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 12. Turn the air only hose (10) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem. 13. Replace the tire valve stem cap. 14. Return the air only hose (10) and power plug (9) back to their original storage location. 15. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle. The tire sealant and compressor kit has accessory adapters in a compartment on the bottom of its housing that can be used to inflate air mattresses, balls, etc.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5508958 CELL ID: 184561 MODIFIED DATE: 03-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit If equipped, the tire sealant and compressor kit is in the rear compartment storage area secured by straps. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the load floor. See Rear Storage. 3. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit. 4. To use the kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit. Replace the tire sealant and compressor kit when finished. Tire Changing Before changing a flat tire, see Hands-Free Operation under Liftgate. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5679499 CELL ID: 183562 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Nov-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) The equipment needed to change a flat tire is stored in the rear of the vehicle. The jacking tools are under the load floor, secured with velcro straps. The jack is behind a door in the trim panel on the driver side.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397853 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 1. Pull to open the trim panel door. The third row driver side seat may need to be folded to access the trim panel door.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397851 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 2. Turn the jack knob counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket. If equipped, remove the wheel blocks from the jack and place the wheel blocks on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed. See If a Tire Goes Flat for more information on the placement of the wheel blocks. Place the jack and wheel blocks near the tire being changed.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397854 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 3. Lift the load floor. Remove the jacking tools and place them near the tire being changed. Use the following tools:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2833108 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Jul-2012 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 1. Jack 2. Wheel Blocks Jack Handle 3. 4. 5. Wheel Wrench Jack Handle Extensions To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics and instructions:

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395461 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 1. Hoist Assembly 2. Hoist Shaft 3. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole 4. Jack Handle Extension 5. Wheel Wrench 6. Spare Tire Lock 7. Hoist End of Extension Tool 8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Up) 10. Tire/Wheel Retainer 11. Hoist Cable

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395463 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 1. Open the hoist shaft access cover(3) on the bumper to access the spare tire lock(6). 2. To remove the spare tire lock (6), insert the mechanical key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2886002 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Jul-2012 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 3. Assemble the jack handle extensions(4) and wheel wrench(5), as shown.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395464 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 4. Insert the open end of the extension(7) through the hole in the rear bumper(8) (hoist shaft access hole). Be sure the hoist end of the extension (7) connects to the hoist shaft. The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. 6. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395465 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395466 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) Tilt the retainer and pull it and the cable and spring through the center of the wheel. 8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat for more information.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2321757 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Sep-2011 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 2. If the vehicle has a center cap that covers the wheel fasteners, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out. If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the wheel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913313 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. Warning: To avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, disable the power assist steps before using a jack or placing an object under the vehicle. See Power Assist Steps. Caution: Only raise the vehicle from the jacking locations shown. Raising the vehicle from the rear could damage the frame or other components. The damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Vehicle Jacking Locations

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395467 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 4. Position the jack lift head as shown, at the jacking location nearest the flat tire. The jack must not be used in any other position. Some Examples of Where Not to Jack

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5403952 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) Warning: Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. Warning: Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Warning: The jack has a feature to limit its travel to prevent overextension. When the height limit is reached, an increase in resistance if felt when attempting to raise the jack farther. Raising the jack past the height limit can damage the jack pin and cause the jack to lock into an overextended position or not lower fully. Do not attempt to force the jack higher once the height limit is reached. 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913316 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 6. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 7. Remove the flat tire. Warning: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 1913319 MODIFIED DATE: 13-Nov-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface. Warning: Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash. 10. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub. 11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2038823 MODIFIED DATE: 30-Oct-2009 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 12. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. Warning: Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications. Caution: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications for the wheel nut torque specification. When reinstalling the regular wheel and tire, also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt-on hub cap, depending on which one the vehicle has. For center caps, line up the tab on the center cap with the slot in the wheel. The cap only goes in one way. Place the cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place. For bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by hand to get them started. Then tighten with the wheel wrench until snug. Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Warning: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Warning: Failure to follow these tire storage instructions carefully could result in personal injury or property damage if the hoist cable fails or if the tire comes loose. Make sure the tire is stored securely before driving. Caution: Always store the spare tire or flat tire with the valve stem pointed up. Stowing a tire with the valve stem pointed down could result in damage to the wheel. Caution: The tire hoist is designed to be raised and lowered with tension on the cable. If the hoist must be raised or lowered without a tire attached, do so only by hand, and at a slow pace, to avoid damaging the mechanism. Do not use power tools. Warning: An improperly stored spare tire could come loose and cause a crash. To avoid personal injury or property damage, always store the spare tire when the vehicle is parked on a level surface. If the vehicle has 275/60R20 or 275/50R22 size tires, the flat tire must be stored inside of the vehicle using the flat tire secure strap inside the glove box. See Storing a Flat Tire Inside of the Vehicle later in this section.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395461 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 1. Hoist Assembly 2. Hoist Shaft 3. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole 4. Jack Handle Extension 5. Wheel Wrench 6. Spare Tire Lock 7. Hoist End of Extension Tool 8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Up) 10. Tire/Wheel Retainer 11. Hoist Cable 1. Put the tire(9) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed up, and to the rear. 2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the tire/wheel retainer from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through the center wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 2886002 MODIFIED DATE: 19-Jul-2012 OWNER: Rosekrans, Dee) 3. Assemble the jack handle extensions(4) and wheel wrench(5). Caution: Use of an air wrench or other power tools with the hoist mechanism is not recommended and could damage the system. Use only the tools supplied with the hoist mechanism.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5395464 MODIFIED DATE: 20-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 4. Insert the open end of the extension(7) through the hole in the rear bumper(8) (hoist shaft access hole). 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. The cable cannot be overtightened.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397048 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Aug-2019 securely. Push, pull, and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 7. Make sure the tire is stored Repeat this tightness check procedure when checking the spare tire pressure according to the scheduled maintenance information or any time the spare tire is handled due to service of other components. Correctly Stored

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397056 MODIFIED DATE: 22-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) Incorrectly Stored

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397063 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. 9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover. Storing the Tools To store the tools:

in the cargo area. 1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag. Use the velcro straps to secure the tool bag under the load floor 2. Position the jack and wheel blocks in the driver side trim panel over the wheelhouse. 3. Turn the jack knob clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket. 4. Close the trim panel door. Storing a Flat Tire Inside of the Vehicle If the vehicle has 275/60R20 or 275/50R22 size tires, the flat tire must be stored inside of the vehicle in the cargo area using the flat tire secure strap inside the glove box. 1. Store the tools. See Storing the Tools earlier in this section. 2. The third row seat must be folded down to provide sufficient space to store the flat tire. If the third row seat cannot be folded down, the flat tire cannot be stored and must be left in a safe location, to be picked up at a later time. 3. Once there is sufficient space in the rear of the vehicle, lift the flat tire and place it on top of the load floor, with the valve stem pointed up.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397859 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 4. Remove the flat tire secure strap from the glove box and place the loop end of the strap through the cargo tie-down. Place the hook end of the strap through the loop and pull it until the strap is fastened securely to the tie-down.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5397860 MODIFIED DATE: 23-Aug-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) 5. Route the hook end of the strap through the wheel, as shown. 6. Attach the hook to the other cargo tie-down in the rear of the vehicle.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5423341 CELL ID: 183565 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) 7. Tighten the strap. Full-Size Spare Tire If this vehicle came with a full-size spare tire, it was fully inflated when new, however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. See Tire Pressure and Vehicle Load Limits for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading the vehicle. For instructions on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see Tire Changing. If equipped with a temporary use full-size spare tire, it is indicated on the tire sidewall. This spare tire should not be driven on over 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h

(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at the proper inflation pressure. Repair and replace the road tire as soon as it is convenient, and stow the spare tire for future use. Caution: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, do not drive in four-wheel drive until the flat tire is repaired and/or replaced. The vehicle could be damaged and the repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when a different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, drive only in two-wheel drive. After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and check that the spare is correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 112 km/h (70 MPH) at the recommended inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip. Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced and installed back onto the vehicle as soon as possible so the spare tire will be available in case it is needed again. Do not mix tires and wheels of difference sizes, because they will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. If the vehicle has a spare tire that does not match the original road tires and wheels in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation. JJump Starting

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5325077 Jump Starting For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery. CELL ID: 183566 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Garcia, Sid) If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. Warning: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Caution: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5248824 MODIFIED DATE: 05-Mar-2019 OWNER: Garcia, Sid) 1. Good Battery Positive Terminal 2. Good Battery Negative Terminal 3. Discharged Battery Remote Negative Terminal 4. Discharged Battery Remote Positive Terminal The jump start positive post (1) and negative post (2) are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start. The jump start positive post (4) and the negative grounding point (3) for the discharged battery are on the passenger side of the vehicle. The positive jump start connection for the discharged battery is under a cover. Slide the cover to expose the terminal. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Caution: If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting. 2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with two batteries, you should know before you begin that, especially in cold weather, you may not be able to get enough power from a single battery in another vehicle to start your diesel engine. If your vehicle has more than one battery, using the battery that is closer to the starter will reduce electrical resistance. This is located on the passenger side, in the rear of the engine compartment. 3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause an unwanted ground connection. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, not in N (Neutral). Caution: If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting. 4. Turn the ignition off on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!

5. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative () terminal locations on that vehicle. The positive (+) terminal is under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post. To uncover the positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover. For more information on the location of the remote positive (+) and remote negative () terminals, see Engine Compartment Overview. Warning: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Warning: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. Warning: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. 6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative () cable to the negative () terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 7. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the remote positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Connect one end of the black negative () cable to the negative () terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative () terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. 10. Connect the other end of the negative () cable to the remote negative () terminal to the discharged battery. 11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Caution: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Jumper Cable Removal Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables. After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes. TTowing the Vehicle

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5443204 Towing the Vehicle CELL ID: 183570 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Richardson, Lamea) Caution: Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle may cause damage. The damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not lash or hook to suspension components. Use the proper straps around the tires to secure the vehicle. Do not drag a locked wheel/tire. Use tire skates or dollies under any locked wheel/tire while loading the vehicle. Do not use a sling type lift to tow the vehicle. This could damage the vehicle. Caution: Improper use of the tow eye can damage the vehicle. If equipped, use the tow eye to load a disabled vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck from a flat road surface, or to move the vehicle a short distance. Use caution and low speeds. The transmission must be in (N) Neutral when moving the vehicle. GM recommends a flatbed tow truck to transport a disabled vehicle. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles, if necessary. A towed vehicle should have its drive wheels off the ground. Contact Roadside Assistance or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. Front Attachment Points

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5443202 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Dec-2019 OWNER: Richardson, Lamea) The vehicle is equipped with specific attachment points to be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed car carrier from a flat road surface. Do not use these attachment points to pull the vehicle from snow, mud or sand. AAppearance Care

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160623 Exterior Care Locks CELL ID: 183578 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Nov-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Washing the Vehicle To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight. Caution: Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product. Caution: Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. If using an automatic car wash, follow the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment. Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. Cleaning Underhood Components Caution: Do not power wash any component under the hood that has thise symbol. This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Solvents or aggressive cleaners may harm underhood components. The usages of these chemicals should be avoided. Recommend water only. A pressure washer may be used, but care must be utilized. The following criteria must be followed:

Water pressure must be kept below 14,000KPa (2,000PSI). Water temperature must be below 80C (180F). Spray nozzle with a 40 degree wide angle spray pattern or wider must be used. Nozzle must be kept at least 30cm (1ft) away from all surfaces. Finish Care Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products. Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur. Caution: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings Caution: Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:

Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution. Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturers instructions. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use. Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under

"Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section. Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them when dry. Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:

Abrasive or caustic agents. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners. Ice scrapers or other hard items. Washer fluids and other cleaning agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer. Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated. Caution: Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Caution: Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only. Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle. Air Intakes Shutter System

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159144 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) The vehicle may have a shutter system designed to help improve fuel economy. Keep the shutter system clear of debris, snow and ice. If the check engine light is activated, please check to see if the shutter system is clear of debris, snow or ice. Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice. Weatherstrips Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at least once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Tires Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires. Wheels and Wheel Trim Caution: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Caution: Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust and ice. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure. Caution: To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Brake System Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts. Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year. Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks. At least every other oil change lubricate the outer tie rod ends. Control arm ball joints are maintenance-free. Body Component Lubrication Underbody Maintenance Caution: Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not be done unless the temperature is 12C (10F) or higher, or damage could result. Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel fuel door hinge and power assist step hinges, unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Caution: Avoid pressure washing the vehicle frame. Use of high-pressure washers can result in removal of corrosion protection and possible vehicle damage. At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. If equipped with power assist steps, extend them and then use a high pressure wash to clean all joints and gaps. Do not directly pressure wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced. Sheet Metal Damage Finish Damage Chemical Paint Spotting If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. See Finish Care previously in this section.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5721173 CELL ID: 183579 MODIFIED DATE: 29-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Salter, Amy) Interior Care To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicles interior. Caution: Immediately remove cleaners, hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result. Caution: Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage to the vehicle. Apply all cleaners directly to a cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls. When using liquid soap cleaners, follow the directions on the specific cleaner or soap solution for dilution instructions. Caution: To prevent damage:

Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface Never use a brush with stiff bristles. Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure. Do not get any exposed electrical components wet. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap. Do not use disinfecting wipes that are scented or contain bleach. Do not use wipes or cleaners that show a color transfer to the wipe or change the Do not use scented or gel-type hand sanitizers. If hand sanitizer comes in contact with interior surfaces of the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents. appearance of the interior surface when used. cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution. Interior Glass To clean, use a microfiber cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water. Caution: To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger. Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog. Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap. Speaker Covers Coated Moldings Coated moldings should be cleaned. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water. Vinyl/Rubber If equipped with vinyl floor and rubber floor mats, use a soft cloth and/or brush dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. Warning: Do not use cleaners that contain silicone, wax-based products, or cleaners that increase gloss on vinyl/rubber floor and mats. These cleaners can permanently change the appearance and feel of the vinyl/rubber and can make the floor slippery. Your foot could slip while operating the vehicle, and you could lose control, resulting in a crash. You or others could be injured. Fabric/Carpet/Suede Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:

Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming. To clean:

fabric. 1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet. 2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth. 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil into the 4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth. 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water. If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet. After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture. Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use. Caution: Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution. Caution: Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use liquids that contain alcohol or solvents on leather seats. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended. Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions. Caution: Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Cargo Cover and Convenience Net If equipped, wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely. Care of Seat Belts Keep belts clean and dry. Floor Mats Warning: Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5159657 CELL ID: 183580 MODIFIED DATE: 24-Feb-2020 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Warning: If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals. Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage:

The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side. Do not place one floor mat on top of another. Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats Pull up on the rear of the driver side floor mat to unlock each retainer and remove.

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5159645 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Oct-2018 OWNER: Wilson, Colleen) Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snapping into position. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place. Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals. Cleaning Rubber Floor Mats (All-Weather Mats and Floor Liners) Warning: Do not use cleaners that contain silicone, wax-based products, or cleaners that increase gloss on rubber floor mats/liners. These cleaners can permanently change the appearance and feel of the rubber and can make the floor mats/liners slippery. Your foot could slip while operating the vehicle, and you could lose control, resulting in a crash. You or others could be injured. Use a soft cloth and/or a brush dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap solution. Service and Maintenance GGeneral Information

(OIE OBJECT ID: 4895382 General Information CELL ID: 183423 MODIFIED DATE: 02-Mar-2020 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed. Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs. Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades. Caution: Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition. Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty. The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 10 000 km/6,000 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions. Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services

- Normal Service are for vehicles that:

Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel. Refer to the information in Additional Required Services - Normal Service. The Additional Required Services - Severe Service are for vehicles that are:

Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain. Used for high speed or competitive driving. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service. Refer to the information in Additional Required Services - Severe Service. Warning: Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work. CELL ID: 214538 MODIFIED DATE: 12-Oct-2020 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Check the tire inflation pressures, including the spare. See Tire Pressure. Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid. MMaintenance Schedule

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5655229 Maintenance Schedule Owner Checks and Services Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil. Once a Month Every Five Years Replace brake fluid. Engine Oil Change Engine Air Filter Change Extended Idle Use When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1000km. If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5000km since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System. When the REPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGE message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the next engine oil change. When the REPLACE ENGINE AIR FILTER SOON message displays, the engine air filter should be replaced at the earliest convenience. Reset the engine air filter life system after the engine air filter is replaced. See Engine Air Filter Life System. When the vehicle is used in a way that requires extended idle time, one hour of use shall be deemed the same as 53km. See Driver Information Center (DIC) for hourmeter. Air Conditioning Desiccant (Replace Every Seven Years) The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer. Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 10 000 km Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil and Engine Oil Life System. Check the air filter life percentage. If necessary, replace the engine air filter and reset the engine air filter life system. See Engine Air Filter Life System. Check engine coolant level. See Cooling System. Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid. Check tire inflation pressures, including the spare. See Tire Pressure. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection. Visually check for fluid leaks. Inspect brake system. See Exterior Care. Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damage, including cracks or tears in the rubber boots, loose or missing parts, or signs of wear at least once a year. See Exterior Care. Lubricate the suspension and steering components at least every other oil change(if equipped with grease fittings). Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually inspect halfshafts and drive shafts for excessive wear, lubricant leaks, and/or damage including: tube dents or cracks, constant velocity joint or universal joint looseness, cracked or missing boots, loose or missing boot clamps, center bearing excessive looseness, loose or missing fasteners, and axle seal leaks. Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check. Visually inspect the fuel system including the evaporative (EVAP) system for damage or leaks. Visually check all fuel pipes, vapor lines, and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition. Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care. Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check. Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed. Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the strut. If the hold open is low, service the gas strut. See Gas Strut(s). Inspect sunroof track and seal, if equipped. See Sunroof. Verify spare tire key lock operation and lubricate as needed. See Tire Changing. Visually inspect the spare tire to ensure that it is tightly stowed under the vehicle. Push, pull, and try to turn the tire. If the spare tire moves, tighten as necessary. See Tire Changing. Additional Required Services Normal Service Replace passenger compartment air filter. Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter. Replace front and rear wiper blades. Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. See Wiper Blade Replacement. Every 10 000 km Every 20 000 km Every 120 000 km Every 150 000 km Every 160 000 km Every 240 000 km Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. See Gas Strut(s). Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/or boots. Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced. Drain and fill engine cooling system. Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System. Visually inspect accessory drive belts. Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed. Severe Conditions Requiring More Frequent Maintenance*

Public service, military, or commercial use vehicles to include the following:

Ambulances, police cars and emergency rescue vehicles. Civilian vehicles such as light duty pick-up trucks, SUVs and passenger cars that are used in military applications. Recovery vehicles such as tow trucks and flatbed single vehicle carriers or any vehicle that is consistently used in towing trailers or other loads. High use commercial vehicles such as courier delivery vehicles, private security patrol vehicles or any vehicles that operate on a 24 hour basis. Any vehicle consistently operated in a high sand or dust environment such as those used on oil pipelines and similar applications. Vehicles that are regularly used for short trips of 6 km or less. The Oil Life Indicator will show you when to change the oil and filter. Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 10 000 km. The indicator won't detect dust in the oil, so if you drive in a dusty area you may have to change the oil and filter sooner than every 10 000 km.

* Footnote: Under extreme driving conditions listed above, it may be necessary to replace your spark plugs at more frequent intervals. For further assistance in determining the most suitable service maintenance intervals for your vehicle, please contact your authorized GM Dealer. Additional Required Services Severe Service Every 70 000 km Every 80 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced. SSpecial Application Services CELL ID: 214539

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2549336 Special Application Services MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change. Have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care. AAdditional Maintenance and Care

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2549338 CELL ID: 214541 Additional Maintenance and Care MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required. It is recommended that your dealer perform these services their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention. The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required. Battery Belts Brakes Fluids Hoses Lamps The 12-volt battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the belts and recommend adjustment or replacement when necessary. Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle. Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicles systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants for GM approved fluids. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled. Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed. Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns. Shocks and Struts Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed. Tires Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money and fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires. To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and protect the vehicles interior and exterior, see Interior Care and Exterior Care. Vehicle Care Wheel Alignment Windshield Wiper Blades Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment. For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed. Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed. RRecommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts CELL ID: 183434

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5316323 MODIFIED DATE: 10-Apr-2019 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Bert) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Duramax diesel supplement. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification, including fluids or lubricants not listed here, can be obtained from your dealer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Cooling System. Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil. Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, Body Door Hinge Pins, Power Assist Steps, Liftgate Hinges, and Fuel Door Hinge. Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5254311 CELL ID: 183435 MODIFIED DATE: 29-May-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Automatic Transmission DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chassis Lubrication Lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Engine Coolant Engine Oil Front Axle/Rear Axle See your dealer. Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer. Transfer Case See your dealer. Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip lubricant. See your dealer. Windshield Washer If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter With high capacity air cleaner Without high capacity air cleaner 84121219 A3244C 84121217 A3246C 12690385 PF63E 13508023 Engine Oil Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter CF185 Spark Plugs 12622441 41-114 Wiper Blades 84278338 Driver Side 55cm (22in) Passenger Side 55cm (22in) 84278338 Rear 30cm (12in) 84215609 MMaintenance Records

(OIE OBJECT ID: 2192745 Maintenance Records CELL ID: 183436 MODIFIED DATE: 05-May-2020 MODIFIED BY: Micakovic, Kim) After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed Technical Data VVehicle Identification

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5377430 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) CELL ID: 183439 MODIFIED DATE: 07-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4822688 MODIFIED DATE: 31-Jan-2018 OWNER: Owens, Lynnette) This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification label and certificates of title and registration. The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications for the vehicle's engine code.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5183251 CELL ID: 314888 MODIFIED DATE: 18-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Goolsby, Matthew) There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information:

Engine Identification Service Parts Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Model designation Paint information Production options If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label inside of the glove box. CELL ID: 183451 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. VVehicle Data

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5294839 Capacities and Specifications If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. Application Capacities Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your dealer for more information. Air Conditioning Refrigerant Engine Cooling System*

Engine Oil with Filter 14.8L 15.6qt 7.6L 8.0qt Fuel Tank 90.8L 24.0gal 1.5L 1.6qt 190Y 140lbft Transfer Case Fluid Wheel Nut Torque Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap 5.3L V8 (L84) D 0.951.10mm (0.0370.043in) All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components. Engine Specifications Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5421538 CELL ID: 183452 MODIFIED DATE: 09-Oct-2019 MODIFIED BY: Wilson, Colleen) Engine Drive Belt Routing If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement. 5.3LEngine

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 4903103 MODIFIED DATE: 21-Nov-2017 OWNER: Burdine, Lynn) Customer Information CCustomer Information

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5375548 Declaration of Conformity Radar Equipment CELL ID: 257372 MODIFIED DATE: 26-Sep-2019 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5375321 MODIFIED DATE: 15-Jul-2019 OWNER: Chandler, Broderick) VVehicle Data Recording and Privacy

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160806 CELL ID: 183593 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy MODIFIED DATE: 25-Oct-2018 MODIFIED BY: Dobson, Elizabeth) The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicles performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5160800 CELL ID: 314893 MODIFIED DATE: 25-Mar-2019 MODIFIED BY: Miller, Ann) Cybersecurity GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services. The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, WIFI or similar technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5700133 CELL ID: 183594 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Jan-2021 MODIFIED BY: Chandler, Broderick) Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as permitted by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner. eCall eeCall Overview

(OIE OBJECT ID: 5616916 eCall Overview CELL ID: 317423 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Jun-2020 MODIFIED BY: Delamielleure, Steve) ERA Glonass (Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus, Armenia, Kyrgyzstan) ERA-GLONASS is a manually or automatically activated emergency service, available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Emergency centers provide assistance and information in an emergency. In the event of a crash, an ERA-GLONASS equipped vehicle may automatically call the nearest emergency center. If built-in sensors detect a crash, an emergency call is placed automatically. An advisor will determine whether help is needed. This service is only available in markets where it is legally required. This service also depends on the availability of emergency centers and the infrastructure in the country. To be available and operational, the system requires functioning vehicle electronics, mobile service, and a GLONASS satellite link. The systems back-up battery has a minimum effective life of three years. Control Buttons

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5616757 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Jun-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve)

(GRAPHIC OBJECT-ID: 5616758 MODIFIED DATE: 04-Jun-2020 OWNER: Delamielleure, Steve) Press to establish an emergency connection, wait for the voice prompt, and press the SOS button again. SOS Button TECT Button Press to cancel a call. This button is also used by technicians for service. While in Test mode, either automatic or manual emergency call will not be made. The system provides feedback via voice messages and an indicator light. Indicator Light Status Green: The system is ready or within the recall time, during which the advisor can call back after an established connection, up to approximately two hours. This can be used with the ignition on or off. Green flashing: Voice connection is established. Red: The system is starting up. The indicator light stays red for up to 15 seconds after turning on the ignition, then turns green. In very cold conditions it may take longer. If the indicator light stays red or turns from green to red, see your dealer. Red/green flashing: The system is in test mode. Do not press any button. Wait until the flashing stops. Red flashing: A call is not possible. Off: The system is off. See your dealer if the indicator light does not illuminate after turning on the ignition. Radio Frequency Statement (US/CAN) This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada's RSP-100 / license-exempt RSS's /

ICES-001. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment This device complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your body. This device must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Ce vhicule est dot de systmes qui fonctionner sur une frquence radio qui est conforme la partie 15/partie 18 de la les rgles de la Commission fdrale des communications (FCC) et avec Innovation, science et conomie Dveloppement (ISDE) Canada RSP-100 / RSS sans licence /

ICES-001. L'exploitation est soumise aux conditions suivantes deux conditions :

1. L'appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2. L'appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris des interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable de l'appareil. Les changements ou modifications apports l'un de ces systmes par un autre qu'un centre de service autoris pourrait annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet quipement Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements FCC et IC mis en place pour un environnement non contrl. L'appareil doit tre install et utilis une distance minimale de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Cet appareil ne doit pas tre colocalis ou fonctionnant conjointement avec tout autre antenne ou metteur. The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. L'appareil destin fonctionner dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est uniquement destin une utilisation en intrieur afin de rduire le potentiel d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes mobiles par satellite cocanaux.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Model: INFO3.7-3.8 CSM Product Label & Placement 8-April-2021 Revision 0 Harman International Industries, Inc. 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 U.S.A. 1 Table of Contents Revision History .......................................................................................................................................... 3 Product Label .............................................................................................................................................. 4 Product Label Placement .......................................................................................................................... 5 2 Revision History Revision 0 Date 8APR2021 Initial release. Description 3 Product Label 1 Product Label 2 NA Version ROW Version 4 Product Label Placement PRODUCT LABEL 1 PRODUCT LABEL 2 5

 

 

 

 

 

 

HARMAN

30001 Cabot Drive

Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703

We

Name:

Address:

City:

Country:

Declare that:

Declaration of Authorization

Harman International Industries, Incorporated

30001 Cabot Dr

Novi, Michigan 48377

USA

Name Representative of agent:

Agent Company name:

Address:

City:

Country

Adyl Mssalak, Teoman Soner-Sunar and Imad Hjije (1)

7layers GmbH

Borsigstraße 11

40880 Ratingen

Germany

is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):

Product description: Automotive Infotainment Units.

Type designation:

INFO3.7-3.8 CSM

FCC ID

2AHPN-BE2854

ISED ID

6434C-BE2854

Trademark:

Validity/ expiry date USPTO Renew date May 19, 2030

HARMAN

on our behalf.

Date:

City:

Name:

Function:

Signature:

…………………2021-July-19..

… ..……………………Novi, MI……

(2) ..………………Mark Bowman……

……Compliance Engineer……….

Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code “owner” or the authorized agent.



 

 

HARMAN 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703 To whom it may concern Novi, Michigan, 07/19/2021 Declaration discontinue transmission Here with we, declare that the Automotive Infotainment Units Harman International Industries, Incorporated 3001 Cabot Dr. Novi, Michigan 48377 USA Model:

INFO3.7-3.8 CSM Fulfills the following requirements (FCC 15.407 (c) and RSS-247 6.4 a):

The device shall automatically discontinue transmission in case of either absence of information to transmit or operational failure. These provisions are not intended to preclude the transmission of control or signaling information, or the use of repetitive codes used by certain digital technologies to complete frame or burst intervals. The transmitter module manufactured by Cyprus Semiconductor Corporation Model CYW89359 included in the product models listed in this document are compliant with medium access mechanisms defined by the IEEE 802.11 standard. When operated in WLAN Access Point mode, the device transmitting beacons periodically as per IEEE 802.11 specification. These operations are in compliance with the above mentioned requirements. Sincerely, Mark Bowman Compliance Engineer Harman International Industries, Incorporated

 

 

HARMAN 30001 Cabot Drive Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703 To:

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046-1609 Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Inc. One Distribution Center Circle, #1 Littleton, MA 02702 Re:

Confidentiality Request Gentlemen:

04-May-2021 This letter is to comply with 47 CFR 0.457(d)(2) and 0.459 pertaining to confidential material. Harman International Industries, Incorporated, requests that the following documents regarding this submission for FCC ID: 2AHPN-BE2854 be kept confidential:

The material above contains technical data, which would customarily be guarded from competitors. 1. Block Diagram 2. Schematics 3. Circuit/Technical Description 4. Parts List/Bill of Materials 5. Operational Description Sincerely, Mark Bowman Regulatory Compliance Engineer 04-May-2021

 

 

04-May-2021

HARMAN

30001 Cabot Drive

Novi, MI 48377 USA

+1.248.785.2361

+1.248.994.2703

To:

Federal Communications Commission

7435 Oakland Mills Road

Columbia, MD 21046-1609

Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services Inc.

One Distribution Center Circle, #1

Littleton, MA 02702

Re:

Short Term Confidentiality Request

Gentlemen:

1. External Photos

Internal Photos

2.

3. Test Setup Photos

4. User’s Manual

Sincerely,

Mark Bowman

Regulatory Compliance Engineer

05-May-2021

Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705, Harman International Industries, Incorporated, requests SHORT-

TERM CONFIDENTIALITY for the following information until 180 days after the grant date of

equipment authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until

marketing of the device. FCC IDs: 2AHPN-BE2854



 

 

HARMAN 3000 I Cabot Drive Novi, Ml 48377 USA

\. + 1.248.785.2361 W + 1.248.994.2703 04-March-2020 HARMAN Subject: FCC Signature Authorization Dear Sirs/Madams, I, Jason Rennon of Harman International Novi, Ml 48337 USA, with Grantee signature of Mark Bowman to be an approved Industries, Incorporated, headquartered 30001 grantee Cabot Drive, with the FCC, authorize the Code 2AHPN, as the approved signature. Best Regards, Jason Rennon Sr. Manager, NA HW Validation

& Cert.